Denon AVR-5805 Operating Instruction

AV SURROUND RECEIVER

AVR-5805

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

RC-995

2

We greatly appreciate your purchase of the AVR-5805.

2

To be sure you take maximum advantage of all the features the AVR-5805 has to offer, read these instructions carefully and use the set properly. Be sure to keep this manual for future reference should any questions or problems arise.

“SERIAL NO. PLEASE RECORD UNIT SERIAL NUMBER ATTACHED TO THE REAR OF THE CABINET FOR FUTURE REFERENCE”

2

2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2 NOTE ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION

•Avoid high temperatures. Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed on a rack.

• Eviter des températures élevées. Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de l’installation sur une étagère.

• Handle the power cord carefully. Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.

• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec précaution. Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du cordon.

• Keep the set free from moisture, water, and dust.

•Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et la poussière.

• Unplug the power cord when not using the set for long periods of time.

• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant de longues périodes.

* (For sets with ventilation holes)

• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.

• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.

• Do not let foreign objects in the set.

• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans l’appareil.

• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in contact with the set.

•Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.

• Never disassemble or modify the set in any way.

• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une manière ou d’une autre.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION

POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTERODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’ AU FOND.

1. PRODUCT

This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

3. NOTE

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC INFORMATION (For US customers)

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

3

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.

2. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

3. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

4. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed.

5. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.

8. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn.

10. Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

11. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product.

15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See Figure A.

16. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.

17. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.

18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

20.

Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

21.

Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service

personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, d) If the product does not operate normally by following the

operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are

covered by the operating instructions as an improper

adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will

often require extensive work by a qualified technician to

restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance

– this indicates a need for service.

22. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.

23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition.

24. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

25. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

FIGURE A

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE

GROUND CLAMP

ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT

ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810-20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250, PART H)

NEC - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

4

2 INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing the DENON AVR-5805 Digital Surround A / V receiver. This remarkable component has been engineered to provide superb surround sound listening with home theater sources such as DVD, as well as providing outstanding high fidelity reproduction of your favorite music sources. As this product is provided with an immense array of features, we recommend that before you begin hookup and operation that you review the contents of this manual before proceeding.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

z

Before Using...............................................................................6

x

Cautions on Installation............................................................6

c

Cautions on Handling................................................................7

v

Features..................................................................................7~9

b

Connections ...............................................................................9

Connecting Audio Components.................................................10

Connecting Video Components.................................................11

Connecting video components equipped with S-Video

jacks...........................................................................................12

Connecting video components equipped with Component

Video video jacks .......................................................................13

Video Conversion Function..................................................13, 14

Connecting equipment with HDMI terminals............................14

Connecting equipment with DVI terminals ...............................15

Connecting the antenna terminals.............................................16

Connecting the external input (EXT.IN) jacks ............................16

Connecting the ZONE2 jacks.....................................................17

Connecting a component with video and audio jacks to

the V.AUX input jacks ................................................................17

DENON LINK connections.........................................................18

Connecting IEEE1394 devices...................................................19

Speaker system connections ..............................................20, 21

n

Part Names and Functions

Front panel...........................................................................22, 23

Display .......................................................................................24

Remote control unit...................................................................25

m

System Setup...........................................................................26

System setup items and default values..............................26~28

Speaker system layout ..............................................................29

Before setting up the system....................................................30

Auto Setup / Room EQ..............................................................30

Measurement flow ...............................................................31

Before performing the Auto Setup procedure .....................32

(I) Connecting the microphone for Auto Setup ........................32

[1] Auto Setup / Room EQ......................................................33

1-1. Setting the Auto Setup.........................................................33

(II) Extra Setup ...........................................................................34

(

III

)Preliminary measurements...................................................35

(IV) Speaker System measurement......................................36, 37

(V) Check of the measurement result .................................38, 39

About the error message .....................................................39

1-2. Setting the Room EQ Setup...........................................40, 41

1-3. Setting the Direct Mode.......................................................41

1-4. Setting the MIC Input Select................................................42

Specifications and setup procedure

for Non-DENON microphone ...................................42, 43

1-5. Check the Parameter .....................................................43~46

[2] Speaker Setup ....................................................................46

2-1. Setting the type of speakers..........................................46, 47

2-2. Setting the low frequency distribution .................................48

2-3. Setting the Delay Time ...................................................49, 50

2-4. Setting the Channel Level..............................................51, 52

2-5. Setting the Crossover Frequency.........................................53

Setting the crossover frequency individually

for the different channels...............................................54

2-6. Selecting the Surround Speakers for the

different surround modes.....................................................55

2-7. Setting the THX Audio Setup

[1] Setting for using a THX Ultra2 compatible

subwoofer ......................................................................56

[2] Surround Back Speaker Position Settings......................57

[3] Audio Input Setup ..............................................................58

3-1. Setting the Digital In Assignment ..................................58, 59

3-2. Setting the EXT.IN Setup................................................60, 61

3-3. Setting the Input Function Level ..........................................62

3-4. Setting the Function Rename ........................................63, 64

3-5. Setting the IEEE1394 Assign ...............................................65

3-6. Selecting the IEEE1394 Auto Function ................................66

3-7. Tuner Presets

[1] Auto Preset Memory......................................................67

[2] Preset Skip .....................................................................68

[3] Preset Name ............................................................69, 70

[4] Video Setup ........................................................................71

4-1. Setting the Component In Assign..................................71, 72

4-2. Setting the Video Convert Mode....................................72, 73

4-3. Setting the Video Scaler.................................................73, 74

4-4. Setting the 3D Y/C Separation..............................................74

4-5. Setting the HDMI/DVI In Assign ....................................75, 76

4-6. Setting the Audio Delay..................................................76, 77

4-7. Setting the On Screen Display (OSD) ............................77, 78

[5] Advanced Playback ............................................................78

5-1. Setting the 2ch Direct/Stereo...............................................79

Setting the front B speakers when the surround

mode is set to the 2-channel Direct or Stereo...............79

5-2. Setting the Dolby Digital Setup ............................................80

5-3. Setting Auto Surround Mode ...............................................81

5-4. Setting the Manual EQ Setup ........................................82, 83

Procedure for copying the “Flat” correction curve........84

[6] Zone Setup (Zone2 = 5.1/7.1ch)........................................85

6-1. Setting the type of speakers for Zone2................................86

6-2. Setting the low frequency distribution for Zone2.................87

6-3. Setting the Delay Time for Zone2 ..................................88, 89

6-4. Setting the Channel Level for Zone2 ............................90, 91

6-5. Setting the Crossover Frequency for Zone2 ........................92

6-6. Setting the Video Setup for Zone2

[1] Video Convert Mode ................................................93, 94

[2] Audio Delay ....................................................................94

6-7. Zone3 and Zone4 tone control and channel level

setting.............................................................................95, 96

Zone Setup setting when Zone2 is set to STEREO or

MONO..........................................................................................96

[7] Option Setup.......................................................................97

7-1. Setting the Channel Setup ...................................................97

Channel setup flow ..................................................97, 98

The number of channels that can be selected ..............99

The subwoofer output composition...............................99

Connecting the preouts................................................100

7-2. Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment...........................101

Power amplifier assignment flow ........................101, 102

Amp Assign mode........................................................103

Bi-Amp connection.......................................................103

Table of power amplifier assignment modes ......103~105

Table of channels to which power amplifiers can

be assigned ..................................................................105

5

7-3. Setting the Volume Control........................................106, 107

7-4. Setting the Trigger Out ...............................................107, 108

7-5. Setting the AC Outlet Assign.....................................109, 110

7-6. Protecting the setting and memory backup

[1] User Memory.......................................................110, 111

[2] Setup Lock ...........................................................111, 112

After Completing system setup.................................................112

,

Remote Control Unit

Inserting the Batteries .............................................................113

Using the Remote Control Unit ...............................................113

Operating DENON audio components ............................114, 115

Preset memory........................................................................116

Operating a component stored in the preset memory ...117, 118

Learning function.....................................................................119

System call ......................................................................120, 121

Punch Through ........................................................................121

Setting the back light’s lighting time.......................................122

Setting the brightness .............................................................122

Resetting .........................................................................123, 124

.

Operation

Operating the Remote control unit..........................................125

Before operating......................................................................125

Playing the input source..................................................126, 127

Playback using external input (EXT.IN) jacks ...........................128

Playing audio sources (CDs and DVDs)...................................129

After stating playback

[1] Setting the Room EQ...................................................130

[2] Listening over headphone............................................130

[3] Turning the sound off temporarily (MUTING)...............130

[4] Combining the currently playing sound with

the desired image (VIDEO SELECT) ............................130

[5] Checking the currently playing program source, etc. ..131

[6] Switching the surround speakers ................................131

[7] Switching between HDMI and DVI monitor output.....131

[8] Selection of resolution setting (SCALE).......................132

Multi-source recording/playback

[1] Playing one source while recording another

(REC OUT mode)..........................................................132

[2] Recording Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel

sources.........................................................................133

[3] Dolby Headphone recording.........................................133

⁄0

Surround

Adjustment steps that need to be performed prior to surround sound playback

[1] Test Tone......................................................................134

[2] Channel Level.......................................................134, 135

Fader function..........................................................................135

Playing modes for different sources .......................................136

THX Surround EX / Home THX Cinema mode

[1] Playing sources recorded in Dolby Surround in the

Home THX Cinema surround mode.....................137, 138

[2] To play in the THX Surround EX/Home THX Cinema

Surround mode for sources recorded in Dolby Digital

or DTS ..........................................................................139

Dolby Digital mode and DTS Surround............................140, 141

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Dolby Pro Logic II) mode................142, 143

DTS NEO:6 mode............................................................144, 145

The Dolby Headphone.....................................................145, 146

Memory and call-out functions (USER MODE function) .........146

⁄1

DENON Original Surround Modes

Surround modes and their features.........................................147

DSP surround simulation.................................................148, 149

Tone control setting

[1] Adjusting the tone using the Remote control

unit .......................................................................149, 150

[2] Adjusting the tone from the Main unit.........................150

⁄2

Multi Zone

Multi-zone playback with multi-source ....................................151

[1] ZONE2 playback ..................................................152~154

[2] ZONE3 playback...........................................................155

[3] ZONE4 playback...........................................................156

[4] Outputting a program source to amplifier, etc., in a

Zone2 room (ZONE2 SELECT mode)...........................157

[5] Outputting a program source to amplifier, etc., in a

Zone3 or Zone4 room

(ZONE3, ZONE4 SELECT mode)..................................157

Remote control unit operations during multi-source

playback ...................................................................................158

System Setup for multi-zone...................................................159

Adjustment steps that need to be performed prior to surround sound playback in Zone2

[1] Test Tone......................................................................159

[2] Channel Level...............................................................160

Fader function..........................................................................161

Zone2 Surround .......................................................................162

Memory and call-out functions of Zone2

(USER MODE function) ...........................................................163

Zone2 tone control setting ..............................................164, 165

⁄3

Listening to the Radio

Auto tuning ..............................................................................165

Manual tuning..........................................................................166

Preset memory........................................................................167

Checking the preset stations...................................................168

Recalling preset stations .........................................................168

RDS (Radio Data System)........................................................169

RDS search..............................................................................170

PTY search...............................................................................171

TP search.................................................................................172

RT (Radio Text).........................................................................173

⁄4

Last Function Memory ..........................................................173

⁄5

Initialization of the Microprocessor.....................................173

⁄6

Troubleshooting.....................................................................174

⁄7

Additional Information

Optimum surround sound for different sources......................175

Surround back speakers ..........................................................176

Speaker setting examples

[1] For THX Surround EX systems

(using surround back speakers) ...........................177, 178

[2] When not using surround back speakers ....................178

Surround

[1] Dolby Surround ....................................................179, 180

[2] DTS Digital Surround............................................180, 181

[3] DTS-ES Extended Surround™......................................181

[4] DTS 96/24 ....................................................................182

[5] Home THX Cinema Surround...............................182, 183

[6] THX Surround EX .........................................................183

Audyssey MultEQ XT ..............................................................184

HDCD.......................................................................................184

DENON LINK ...........................................................................185

About IEEE1394 ......................................................................185

About HDMI.............................................................................185

Advanced AL24 Processing.....................................................185

Surround modes and parameters....................................186, 187

Relationship between the video input signal and

monitor output (MAIN ZONE)..................................................188

Relationship between the video input signal and

monitor output (ZONE2) ..........................................................189

⁄8

Specifications.................................................................190, 191

6

1

BEFORE USING

2

CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION

Pay attention to the following before using this unit:

• Moving the set To prevent short circuits or damaged wires in the connection cords, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the connection cords between all other audio components when moving the set.

• Before turning the power switch on Check once again that all connections are proper and that there are not problems with the connection cords. Always set the power switch to the standby position before connecting and disconnecting connection cords.

• Store these instructions in a safe place. After reading, store these instructions along with the warranty in a safe place.

• Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ

from the actual set for explanation purposes.

Noise or disturbance of the picture may be generated if this unit or any other electronic equipment using microprocessors is used near a tuner or TV. If this happens, take the following steps:

• Install this unit as far as possible from the tuner or TV.

• Set the antenna wires from the tuner or TV away from this unit’s power cord and input/output connection cords.

• Noise or disturbance tends to occur particularly when using indoor antennas or 300 Ω/ohms feeder wires. We recommend using

outdoor antennas and 75 Ω/ohms coaxial cables.

For heat dispersal, leave at least 10 cm of space between the top, back and sides of this unit and the wall or other components.

4 inch/10 cm or more

Wall

4 inch/10 cm or more

2 ACCESSORIES

Check that the following parts are included in addition to the main unit:

q Operating instructions ............................................................................1

w Warranty (for North America model only)...............................................1

e Service station list...................................................................................1

r AC cord...................................................................................................1

t Remote control unit (RC-995).................................................................1

r

t

yui

y R03/AAA alkaline batteries .....................................................................4

u AM loop antenna ....................................................................................1

i FM indoor antenna..................................................................................1

o List of preset codes................................................................................1

7

4

FEATURES

1. DENON Proprietary Digital Technology

1) NEW D.D.S.C.-Digital (Dynamic Discrete Surround Circuit) Powered by four high performance, high speed 32 bit floating point DSP processors, the AVR-5805 represents the pinnacle of precision DSP processing technology. Unlike competitive units, DENON’s discrete surround technology consists of selected individual processors and ancillary elements, working in harmony via proprietary DENON inter-IC digital communication technology.

2) DENON Link With select DENON DVD players that feature DENON Link digital outputs, encrypted digital multi-channel audio transfers to the AVR-5805 directly, eliminating unnecessary digital-toanalog and subsequent analog-to-digital conversions for the highest possible signal transfer integrity. The DENON Link function supports up to ultra high resolution 192 kHz DVD-A digital datastreams, for maximum reproduced fidelity.

3) Latest AL24 DSP Processing DENON’s acclaimed Advanced AL24 DSP processing improves the fidelity of high resolution stereo PCM sources such as CD and DVD (up to 192 kHz sampling frequencies), by sophisticated DSP processing algorithms that improve low level detail and enhance fidelity by upsampling and adaptive filtering techniques. Advanced AL24 provides increased dynamic range and spatial information; bring out all the nuances with optimum clarity and natural fidelity.

4) AL24 DSP Processing For All Channels For the AVR-5805, DENON’s AL24 processing supports multichannel DVD-Audio for all channels, including the Zone2 multichannel theater channels, for optimum fidelity and low level detail reproduction in both the main zone as well as the second multi-channel Zone2 system.

2. Latest Surround Decoding Technology

1) Dolby Digital Using advanced digital audio compression and decoding technologies, Dolby Digital provides up to 5.1 channels of wide bandwidth, wide dynamic range multi-channel high fidelity surround sound. Dolby Digital is the default digital multichannel audio delivery system for DVD and USA/Canada high definition television systems.

2) Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic

IIx adds the ability to provide up to 7.1 channel

reproduction from conventional stereo (2 channel) sources, including surround back reproduction with a 6.1 or 7.1 surround sound system. Pro Logic IIx has three modes: one for moviebased soundtracks; one for stereo music sources, and a game mode for game consoles with stereo (2 channel) audio outputs.

3) Dolby Headphone Developed jointly by Dolby Laboratories and Lake Technology Ltd. of Australia, Dolby Headphone decoding provides thrilling surround sound effects of your favorite movie and music sources when using conventional stereo headphones.

4) DTS (Digital Theater Systems) DTS provides up to 5.1 channels of wide-range, high fidelity surround sound from sources such as DTS-encoded CDs, DVDs with DTS soundtracks, and DVD-Audio discs that provide DTS soundtracks.

5) DTS-ES Extended Surround and DTS Neo:6 The AVR-5805 also supports the DTS-ES 6.1 matrix and discrete encoded surround formats, and also features DTS Neo:6 stereo-to-surround decoding with both Music and Movie modes for superb surround sound from conventional stereo sources.

6) DTS 96/24 Decoding Digital Theater Systems 96/24 provides ultra high resolution 24 bit, 96 kHz sampling for optimum wide bandwidth fidelity and superb dynamic range. The AVR-5805 is equipped to faithfully decode DTS 96/24 discs.

7) HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital Using sophisticated encoding and decoding technologies, the HDCD format provides improved fidelity and dynamic range from encoded Compact Discs (which number in the thousands of titles). The AVR-5805, via a standard digital audio connection from a CD player or DVD player, internally recognizes and decodes HDCD discs for optimum fidelity and widest dynamic range.

8) Home THX Ultra2 Certified Home THX is the unique collaboration between THX Ltd. and audio/video equipment manufacturers. THX Ultra2 certification is the highest performance level, and provides a rigorous set of performance standards along with proprietary surround sound post-processing technologies, all designed to maximize the surround soundtrack playback experience in the home theater. In addition, the AVR-5805 is fully compatible with THX Surround EX, which provides extended surround sound via additional surround back channel reproduction, first employed on Lucasfilms’ Star Wars Episode 1 – The Phantom Menace, and featured on many major motion pictures since. As well, the AVR-5805’s power amplifier section fully complies with the latest THX Ultra2 standards, and two new addition surround modes are also provided – THX Ultra2 Cinema mode and THX Music mode. In addition, the AVR-5805 also incorporates THX’s new THX Games mode, for thrilling surround sound effects from two channel game box audio sources.

3

CAUTIONS ON HANDLING

• Switching the input function when input jacks are not

connected

A clicking noise may be produced if the input function is switched when nothing is connected to the input jacks. If this happens, either turn down the MASTER VOLUME control or connect components to the input jacks.

• Muting of PRE OUT jacks and SPEAKER terminals The PRE OUT jacks and SPEAKER terminals include a muting circuit. Because of this, the output signals are greatly reduced for several seconds after the power switch is turned on or input function, surround mode or any other-set-up is changed. If the volume is turned up during this time, the output will be very high after the muting circuit stops functioning. Always wait until the muting circuit turns off before adjusting the volume.

• Whenever the power switch is in the STANDBY state, the

apparatus is still connected on AC line voltage. Please be sure to turn off the power switch or unplug the cord when you leave home for, say, a vacation.

8

3. Movie & Music Surround For The Whole House

The AVR-5805’s versatile Multi Source functions let you select different audio and video sources for each room in your home. Different audio and video multi-channel sources can be enjoyed in the home theater (Main room), as well as a multi-channel audio and video source directed to a second room. Additional zones (3 and 4) can also receive video and stereo audio as well. The AVR5805 features Freely Assignable Ten Power Amp Channels, so that you can decide which power amp channels can be dedicated to the main zone, the secondary zone (Zone2) as well as to two additional zones (Zone3 and Zone4), as well as providing line level outputs to external power amplifiers.

1) Zone2 Theater Capability With up to 9.1 system in the main home theater room, the AVR-5805 provides for a second, fully 5.1 capable system in Zone2, with component video and five amplifier channels as well, with video up-conversion if desired.

2) Zone3 Independent Audio & Video The AVR-5805 provides the ability for a third independent zone, with selectable audio and video sources.

3) Zone4 Independent Audio Zone4 is ideal for a room where you can enjoy a different stereo source, for background music listening.

4. Ten High Power Assignable Power Amplifiers

1) Featuring high current, THX-certified high power amplifier channels, the AVR-5805 is equipped to drive high performance loudspeakers with unprecedented dynamic range and low impedance drive capability, with each of the ten amplifier channels rated at 170 W into 8 Ω/ohms. Each channel can be freely assigned to the main home theater room, as well as assigned to additional zones for multi-channel or stereo or even monophonic distributed audio/video and audio-only functions. For example, you might choose to have seven amplifier channels dedicated to a full THX Surround EX & DTS Surround EX 7.1 channel system in the main room, while still allowing a powered stereo function in the second zone, and a third monophonic background music function in another room. Or, you could have a principal 5.1 channel setup in the main home theater room, while having a secondary powered 5.1 system in the second zone. You could even have (with compatible biamplified-capable speakers) a true 5.1 bi-amped system in the main room, along with additional line-level-powered systems in up to three additional rooms.

5. Audiophile Audio Quality Throughout

1) Separated Pure Audio & Video Chassis Construction For optimum audio and video quality, the AVR-5805 features dedicated and physically separated low and high level audio and video circuits to prevent degrading mutual interference.

2) Optimum Chassis Stability As the AVR-5805 is equipped with a massive toroidal main power supply and additional secondary power supplies, centrally located within the chassis, a fifth chassis foot helps reduce the physical vibration that can cause mechanicallyinduced vibration-related distortions.

3) Multiple Separate Power Supply Topologies No less than six individual power transformers (one very large toroidal unit, and five additional lower voltage power transformer units) are provided, ensuring that each critical subsection draws power from its own dedicated supply, eliminating minute fluctuations that occur with single transformer-equipped competitive units.

4) Multiple Toroidal Sub-Windings The massive main toroidal power transformer (which powers the ten amplifier channels block) features dedicated subwindings and high current, ultra stable DC rectifiers and high rated smoothing/storage capacitors, with a tremendous 132,000 µF total storage capacity.

5) Pure Direct Mode According to the selected input source, the Pure Direct Mode provides the optimum decoding by switching off any and all unnecessary processing (video disable, tone bybass, and other unnecessary circuits).

6) Dual Surround Speaker Mode DENON was the first to introduce Dual Surround Mode Speaker Switching, where two different types (and positions) of surround speakers could be chosen according to the source material – diffuse surround speakers located at the sides of the listening position for movie surround sound, and directional surround speakers located at the room’s rear corners for music surround sound. The AVR-5805 also adds the ability to have both powered (AVR-5805 amplified) music and surround sound speaker systems, according to each individual home theater’s setup circumstances.

7) Highest Quality Input & Output Terminals The AVR-5805 audio and video input terminals are gold-plated, as are the ten speaker terminal pairs, which accept bare wire as well as banana plugs.

6. High Resolution Video Section

1) Component Video Switching In addition to composite and S-video switching, the AVR-5805 provides no less than five sets of component video inputs via RCA-type coaxial connectors, as well as an additional sixth set of component video inputs via BNC connectors, as well as two sets of component video outputs (one for RCA-type coaxial, one for BNC connectors), with additional capability for component video output to Zone2. These component video circuits are fully HD-compatible, with a flat response to 100 MHz, far above the 38 MHz requirement for true HD reproduction, ensuring crisp and clear HDTV picture quality.

2) Video Up And Down Conversion Function To eliminate video signal incompatibility, the AVR-5805 is equipped with video up-conversion and down-conversion. Composite and S-video signals are internally up-converted to component video for the main zone, and down-converted for 480i component video signals. Zone2 features downconversion from S-video to composite video.

3) Progressive Scanning & Scaling Function Via high quality Faroudja DCDi™ (*1) processing, the AVR-5805 converts standard definition interlaced video to higher resolution progressive scanning format – 480i interlace to 480p progressive. For non-copy-protected video signals, further upconversion to HD 1080i video is also provided, for highest visual quality with compatible HD video displays.

4) High Resolution 12 bit/216 MHz Video D/A Conversion Featuring Analog Devices ADV-7310 Noise Shaped Video (*2) digital-to-analog converters, the AVR-5805 provides superior high resolution video output free from video noise and conversion artifacts.

5) Superior S-video Processing A 3-dimensional Y-C separation circuit provides artifact-free composite video to S-video up-conversion, and Time Base Correction for optimum color sharpness with composite video inputs (main zone).

7. Latest Digital A/V Input/Output Capability With Future Upgrade Ability

1) HDMI/DVI Switching

High Definition Multi-media Interface provides digital audio and video signal transfer between source components, the AVR5805, and compatible video displays with HDMI digital interface. Digital Visual Interface provides similar digital input/output capability for digital video signals. The AVR-5805 is equipped with three HDMI inputs and one DVI input, and one each HDMI and DVI outputs to compatible video displays. Each HDMI/DVI input feeds both HDMI and DVI outputs, for optimum compatibility with today’s HDMI- and DVI-equipped video displays.

9

5

CONNECTIONS

• Do not plug in the AC cord until all connections have been completed.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).

• Insert the plugs securely. Incomplete connections will result in the generation of noise.

• Use the AC OUTLETS for audio equipment only. Do not use

them for hair driers, etc.

• Note that binding pin plug cords together with AC cords or placing them near a power transformer will result in generating hum or other noise.

• Noise or humming may be generated if a connected audio equipment is used independently without turning the power of this unit on. If this happens, turn on the power of the this unit

.

2) IEEE 1394 Compatability Two IEEE 1394 digital interface inputs are provided, allowing SACD DSD and DVD-Audio digital audio signal input capability with select DENON DVD players that feature IEEE 1394 digital output function, and feature DENON’s D.A.S.S. (DENON Audio Synchronized System) function, which reduces data jitter for superior high resolution DSD and PCM reproduction.

3) Ethernet Function For full compatibility with external control systems, such as AMX and Crestron, the AVR-5805 features Ethernet connectivity.

4) RS-232C Serial Input/Output Function For full compatibility with external control systems, such as AMX and Crestron, the AVR-5805 features a RS-232C serial I/O port. A second RS-232C serial I/O port is provided on the front panel, for future software and system upgrade capability.

5) Future Surround Format Inputs & Outputs For possible future surround sound formats, the AVR-5805 features up to ten channel audio inputs (nine main channels plus an additional low frequency effects channel), with high resolution A/D conversion on each input. A second set of 5.1 analog inputs is also provided, for connection to surround sources such as SACD and/or DVD-Audio players.

8. Easy-To-Use Functions

1) Automatic Setup With Room Equalization Featuring the newest Audyssey MultEQ XT technology, the AVR-5805 provides automatic room equalization with multiple measurement points for optimum response throughout the listening room.

2) Three User-Definable Easy Modes Three User Modes are provided, allowing you to store and recall your favorite surround modes with individual level memories at the touch of a button.

3) Digital Audio Delay Function For optimum picture and sound synchronization, the AVR-5805 features an adjustable digital audio delay function, variable from 0 ~ 200 milli-seconds.

4) Adjustable Crossover Frequencies For the widest compatibility with various main speaker and subwoofer combinations, the AVR-5805 is equipped with a choice of ten different crossover frequencies (40, 60, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 150, 200 and 250 Hz crossover points), individually adjustable for each of the main speaker systems.

5) The AVR-5805 provides dual subwoofer outputs, along with an additional subwoofer output dedicated for the Low Frequency Effects channel (main zone).

6) Auto Surround Mode For each input source, a separate memory stores your preferred surround sound mode and other settings, eliminating the need to re-configure the surround mode parameters whenever you switch between input sources.

7) Assignable High Current Trigger Outputs Four different 12 Volt trigger outputs allow the automatic activation of externally controlled devices, such as motorized drop-down screens, motorized drapery, motorized screen masking systems and other trigger-activated systems. Each port supports 12V/250mA trigger-activated functions, assignable by zone (Main Zone, Zone2, Zone3, or Zone4).

8) Assignable AC Outlets Three assignable AC convenience outlets are provided, and each can be activated by choice of input source or surround sound mode by each zone, to activate specific external components as necessary.

9) Front Panel Convenience Inputs A set of front panel A/V inputs allows quick connection of A/V sources, such as a video camcorder or a game console.

10) Electro-Luminescent Membrane Touch-Panel Remote Control Featuring back-lit EL technology, the AVR-5805 remote control displays a specific function key set for each selected component, and is pre-programmed with hundreds of remote control code sets and features learning capability as well.

11) Large Fluorescent Display For easy setup and system monitoring, the AVR-5805 features a clearly readable FL display that provides extensive system status and setup monitoring.

12) Preset Memory Tuning Up to 56 AM and FM stations can be stored in the tuner memory, in any combination and in any order of AM and FM stations.

13) AC Input Detachable AC Cord.

14) Other Useful Functions Digital Audio Input to Analog Recording Output conversion Input Source Re-naming Function Audio Level Memories for each input Personal Memory Plus function stores surround mode, level memories, analog or digital input selection for each input Volume Level Limiter provides a user-definable pre-set volume level for multi-zone audio operation Power On Volume Level Memory provides a user-definable volume level that is activated every time the AVR-5805 is powered up Setup Lock Function prevents mis-operation at start-up Personal Default Memory function RDS tuner capability

*1: “DCDi™” is trademark of Faroodja, a division of Genesis

Microchip Inc.

*2: “NSV” is a trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.

10

Connecting Audio Components

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.

OUTPUT INPUT

OPTICAL

RLRL

OUTPUT INPUT

R

OUTPUT

L

OPTICALCOAXIAL

OUTPUT

RLR

L

R L R L

R

L

R

L

R

L

B

DIGITAL AUDIO

B

DIGITAL AUDIO

CD player

Connecting a CD player

Connect the CD player’s analog output jacks (ANALOG OUTPUT) to this unit’s CD jacks using pin plug cords.

Connecting a turntable

Connect the turntable’s output cord to the AVR-5805’s PHONO jacks, the L (left) plug to the L jack, the R (right) plug to the right jack.

NOTE:

This unit cannot be used with MC cartridges directly. Use a separate head amplifier or step-up transformer.

If humming or other noise is generated when the ground wire is connected, disconnect the ground wire.

Turntable

(MM cartridge)

Ground wire

AC cord

(Supplied)

Connecting the pre-out jacks

Use these jacks if you wish to connect external power amplifier(s) to increase the power of the front, center, surround and surround back sound channels, or for connection to powered loudspeakers. When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to left channel.

Connecting the AC OUTLETS

AC OUTLETS

• SWITCHED (total capacity – 120 W (1 A.)) The power to these outlets is turned on and off in conjunction with the POWER switch on the main unit, and when the power is switched between on and standby from the remote control unit. No power is supplied from these outlets when this unit’s power is at standby. Never connect equipment whose total capacity is above 120 W (1 A.)

NOTES:

• Only use the AC OUTLETS for audio equipment. Never use them for hair driers, TVs or other electrical appliances.

• The AC outlets can be set to turn on and off for the different functions. For details, see “Setting the AC Outlet Assign”. (See pages 109, 110)

AC outlets (wall)

AC 120V, 60Hz

MD recorder, CD recorder or other component equipped with digital input/output jacks

CD player or other component equipped with digital output jacks

Connecting the DIGITAL jacks

Use these for connections to audio equipment with digital output. Only one type of connector needs to be used, you can decide which based on availability of coaxial and optical inputs. Refer to pages 58, 59 for instructions on setting this terminal.

NOTES:

• Use 75 Ω/ohms cable pin cords for coaxial connections.

• Use optical cables for optical connections, removing the cap before connecting.

Connecting a tape deck

Connections for recording:

Connect the tape deck’s recording input jacks (LINE IN or REC) to this unit’s tape recording (OUT) jacks using pin plug cords.

Connections for playback:

Connect the tape deck’s playback output jacks (LINE OUT or PB) to this unit’s tape playback (IN) jacks using pin plug cords.

CD recorder or Tape deck

DENON Link terminal

Use this terminal to connect a DENON DVD player for high quality digital multichannel sound. (See page 18)

Route the connection cords, etc., in such a way that they do not obstruct the ventilation holes.

11

Connecting Video Components

•To connect the video signal, connect using a 75 Ω/ohms video signal cable cord. Using an improper cable can result in a drop in picture quality.

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.

• The AVR-5805 is equipped with a function for up and down converting video signals. (See page 13) The signal connected to the video signal terminal is output to the S-Video and component video monitor out terminals. But the REC OUT terminals have no conversion function, so when recording connect the appropriate video terminals.

R OUT

VIDEO

OUT

L

AUDIO

R OUT

VIDEO

OUT

L

AUDIO

R OUT IN

AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT IN

LRL

R OUT IN

AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT IN

LRL

R OUT

VIDEO

OUT

L

AUDIO

IN

VIDEO

R

L

R

L

RLR

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

B

TV

DVD player or video disc player (VDP), etc.

Monitor TV

Connecting a TV tuner

TV

• Connect the TV’s tuner’s video output jack (VIDEO OUTPUT) to the (yellow) TV IN jack using a 75 Ω/ohms video coaxial pin plug

cord.

• Connect the TV’s tuner’s audio output jacks (AUDIO OUTPUT) to the

TV IN jacks using pin plug cords.

AUDIO

VIDEO

C

onnecting a DVD player or a video disc player (VDP)

DVD

• Connect the video disc player’s video output jack (VIDEO OUTPUT) to the (yellow) DVD IN jack using a

75 Ω/ohms video coaxial pin plug cord.

• Connect the video disc player’s analog audio output jacks (ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT) to the DVD IN

jacks using pin plug cords.

• VDP can be connected to the VDP jacks in the same way.

AUDIO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

• Connect the TV’s video input jack (VIDEO INPUT) to the

MONITOR OUT jack using a 75 Ω/ohms video coaxial pin plug cord.

VIDEO

Note on connecting the digital input jacks

• Only audio signals are input to the digital input jacks. For details, see page 10.

Video deck 2Video deck 1

• There are four sets of video deck (VCR) jacks, so four video decks can be connected for simultaneous recording or video copying.

Video input/output connections:

• Connect the video deck’s video output jack (VIDEO OUT) to the (yellow) VCR-1 IN jack, and the video deck’s video input jack (VIDEO IN) to the (yellow) VCR-1 OUT jack using 75 Ω/ohms video coaxial pin plug cords.

Connecting the audio output jacks

• Connect the video deck’s audio output jacks (AUDIO OUT) to the VCR-1 IN jacks, and the video deck’s audio input jacks (AUDIO IN) to the VCR-1 OUT jacks using pin plug cords. Connect other video decks to the VCR-2, VCR-3 or VCR-4 jacks in the same way.

AUDIO

VIDEO

Connecting the video recorders

Connecting a monitor TV

Connecting a DBS tuner

DBS

• Connect the DBS tuner’s video output jack (VIDEO OUTPUT) to the (yellow) DBS IN jack using a 75 Ω/ohms video coaxial pin

plug cord.

• Connect the DBS tuner’s audio output jacks (AUDIO OUTPUT) to the

DBS IN jacks using pin plug cords.

AUDIO

VIDEO

NOTE:

• Connecting a LD (laser disc) player with a Dolby

Digital RF Output.

The AVR-5805 does not have a DD RF demodulator function. Therefore, you need to use a commercially available outboard DD RF demodulator and connect its digital output to one of the AVR-5805 available digital inputs. Refer to the demodulator’s owner’s manual for further information.

DBS tuner

12

Connecting video components equipped with S-Video jacks

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.

• A note on the S-Video input jacks The input selectors for the S-Video inputs and Video inputs work in conjunction with each other.

• The AVR-5805 is equipped with a function for converting video signals. (See page 13) The signal connected to the S-Video signal terminal is output to the composite video and component video monitor out terminals. But the REC OUT terminals have no conversion function, so when recording connect the S-Video terminals.

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

IN

S-VIDEO

OUT IN

S-VIDEO

OUT IN

S-VIDEO

B

Monitor TV

Video deck 2Video deck 1

TV

Connecting a monitor TV

Connecting the video decks

Connecting a TV

MONITOR OUT

• Connect the TV’s or DBS tuner’s S video input (S-VIDEO INPUT) to the MONITOR OUT jack using a S jack connection cord.

S-VIDEO

• Connect the TV’s S video output jack (S-VIDEO OUTPUT) to the TV IN jack using an S jack connection cord.

S-VIDEO

• Connect the video deck’s S output jack (S-OUT) to the VCR-1 IN jack and the video deck’s S input jack (S-IN) to the VCR-1 OUT jack using S jack connection cords.

• Connect the video deck’s S output jack (S-OUT) to the VCR-2 IN jack and the video deck’s S input jack (S-IN) to the VCR-2 OUT jack using S jack connection cords.

Connect the third and fourth video deck to the VCR-3 and VCR-4 jacks in the same way.

S-VIDEO

Connect the components’ audio inputs and outputs as described on page 10.

NOTES:

• The video signal ZONE2 MONITOR OUT (yellow), S-Video signal ZONE2 MONITOR OUT jack or component signal ZONE2 MONITOR OUT output switches together with the input function selected with the ZONE2 SELECT (See page 157). To use as the monitor output, set “SOURCE” as the ZONE2 input function. The on-screen display signals are output from the ZONE2 MONITOR OUT (See pages 152~154).

• The video signal ZONE3 MONITOR OUT (yellow) or S-Video signal ZONE3 MONITOR OUT output switches together with the input function selected with the ZONE3/REC SELECT (See page 157). To use as the monitor output, set “SOURCE” as the ZONE3/REC SELECT input function. At this time, the on-screen display signals are not output from the ZONE3 MONITOR OUT (See page 155).

DVD player or video disc player (VDP)

Connecting a DVD player or a video disc player (VDP)

DVD

• Connect the DVD player’s S-Video output jack to the S-VIDEO DVD IN jack using a S-Video connection cord.

• VDP can be connected to the VDP jacks in the same way.

• It is also possible to connect a video disc player, DVD player, video camcorder, game machine, etc., to the V.AUX jacks.

Connecting a DBS tuner

• Connect the DBS tuner’s S video output jack (S-VIDEO OUTPUT) to the DBS IN jack using an S-Video connection cord.

S-VIDEO

DBS tuner

13

Connecting video components equipped with Component Video (color difference) video jacks (Component - Y, Pb, Pr ; Y, Cb, Cr)

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.

• The signals input to the component (color difference) video jacks are not output from the VIDEO output jack (yellow) or the S-Video output jack.

• Some video sources with component video outputs are labeled Y, P

B, PR, or Y, CB, CR, or Y, B-Y, R-Y. These terms all refer to component video

color difference output.

• The function assigned to the component video input can be changed at the system setup. For details, see “Setting the Component In Assign”. (See pages 71, 72)

YPB PR

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT

YPB PR

VIDEO OUT

COMPONENT

DVD player Monitor TV

Connecting a DVD player

Connecting a monitor TV

DVD IN jacks

• Connect the DVD player’s component (color difference) video output jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT) to the COMPONENT DVD IN jack using 75 Ω/ ohms coaxial video pin-plug cords.

• In the same way, another video source with component video outputs such as a DTV/DBS tuner, etc., can be connected to the TV/DBS component (color difference) video jacks.

MONITOR OUT jack

• Connect the TV’s component (color difference) video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT) to the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-2 jack using 75 Ω/ohms coaxial video pin-plug cords.

• Connect the TV’s component (color difference) video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT) to the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-1 jack using BNC connectors.

• The COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-1 and the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-2 can be used simultaneously.

• The component video input and/or output jacks may be labeled differently on some TVs, monitors or video components (Y, Pb, Pr; Y, Cb, Cr; Y, B-Y, RY). Check the owner’s manuals for other components for further information.

(MONITOR OUT / ZONE2)

The Video Conversion Function

The AVR-5805 is equipped with a function for up and down converting video signals. Because of this, the AVR-5805’s MONITOR OUT jack can be connected to the monitor (TV) with a set of cables offering a higher quality connection, regardless of how the player and the AVR-5805’s video input jacks are connected. Generally speaking, connections using the component video jacks offer the highest quality playback, followed by connections using the S-Video jacks, then connections using the regular video jacks (yellow).

This unit’s input jacks This unit’s output jacks

The flow of the video signals.

(Component Video Jacks)

(S-Video jack)

(Video jack)

(Component Video Jacks)

(S-Video jack)

(Video jack)

Cautions on the Zone2 video conversion function:

There is no TBC (Time Base Collector) for Zone2. When the component video terminals are used to connect the AVR-5805 with a TV (or monitor, projector, etc.) and the video (yellow) or S video terminals are used to connect the AVR-5805 with a VCR, depending on the combination of the TV and VCR the picture may flicker in the horizontal direction, be distorted, be out of sync or not display at all when playing video tapes. If this happens, connect a commercially available video stabilizer, etc., with a TBC (time base corrector) function between the AVR-5805 and the VCR, or if your VCR has a TBC function, turn it on.

( : only 480i/580i )

14

NOTES:

•Video down conversion to the Main Zone’s monitor output is only possible when the component video input resolution is 480i (interlaced standard definition video – NTSC format, for North America) or 576i (interlaced standard definition video – PAL format, for Europe and other countries).

• This video conversion function cannot be used with HDMI or DVI video signals.

• When not using the S-Video monitor output connector for the Main zone or Zone2, the composite video input signal is given priority and up-converted to a component video signal. To convert with priority to the S-Video input signal, set the video convert mode to “S-Video”. To change the setting of the video conversion mode for the Main zone, see pages 72, 73. To change the setting of the video conversion mode for the Zone2, see pages 93, 94.

• It is not possible to down-convert from the Zone2’s component video signal to a S-Video or composite signal, so when not using the Zone2’s component monitor output connector, use an S-Video connection cord or composite connection cord to connect the AVR-5805 with the player.

OUT

HDMI

(HDCP)

HDMI IN

Connecting equipment with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) terminals

•A simple 1-cable connection (using a commercially available cable) with a device having an HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector allows digital transfer of the digital images of DVD video and other sources, and the multi-channel sound of DVD audio and DVD video.

• The HDMI and DVI-D monitor output connectors on the AVR-5805 can only be used one at a time, not simultaneously.

•To provide audio output from AVR-5805’s audio output connector, select “Amp” at the System Setup.

•To provide audio output from the TV, select “TV” at the System Setup. For details, see “Setting the HDMI/DVI In Assign”. (See pages 75, 76)

Connecting a monitor TV

HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal

• Connect the TV’s HDMI input terminals to the HDMI OUT terminal using HDMI cable.

Connecting a DVD player

HDMI IN terminals

• Connect the DVD player’s HDMI output terminals to the HDMI IN terminal using HDMI cable.

•

Among the devices that support HDMI, some devices can control other devices via the HDMI connector; however, the

AVR-5805

cannot be controlled by another device via the HDMI connector.

•

The audio signals from the HDMI connector (including the sampling frequency and bit length) may be limited by the equipment that is connected.

•

The on-screen display signals are not outputted from the HDMI MONITOR OUT.

HDMI cable

(commercially available)

To play back the digital video and audio of DVD video and DVD audio through an HDMI/DVI-D connection, both the connected player and monitor are required to support a copyright protection system called HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System).

HDCP is copy protection technology that comprises data encryption and authentication of the partner equipment. The AVR-5805 supports HDCP. Please see the user’s manual of your video display for more information about this.

Copyright Protection System

DVD player

Monitor equipped with

HDMI input connectors

HDMI cable

(commercially available)

NOTE:

• The audio signals on the multi/stereo area of super audio CDs are not output.

For DVD Audio discs that are copyright-protected by CPPM, neither the video nor audio signals are output.

15

OUT

DVI-D

(HDCP)

DVI-D IN

Connecting equipment with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) terminals

• Connection with equipment that has a DVI (Digital Visual Interface)-D connector permits the transfer of digital images. Make an audio connection also.

• Commercially-available DVI cables are available in 24-pin and 29-pin types. The AVR-5805 supports the 24-pin DVI-D cable.

• The HDMI and DVI-D monitor output connectors on the AVR-5805 can only be used one at a time, not simultaneously.

• The on-screen display signals are not outputted from the DVI-D MONITOR OUT.

Connecting a monitor TV

DVI-D MONITOR OUT terminal

• Connect the TV’s DVI-D input terminal to the DVI-D MONITOR OUT terminal using DVI-D cable.

Connecting a DVD player

DVI-D IN terminal

• Connect the DVD player’s DVI-D output terminals to the DVI-D IN terminal using DVI-D cable.

Note on connecting a HDMI/DVI

•

The table below indicates the compatibility of connections between the HDMI/DVI-D output connector of the

AVR-5805 and monitors that

support HDMI/DVI-D.

24P DVI-D cable

(commercially available)

E

HDMI output

terminal

Monitor with

HDMI

C

(Video / Audio)

C

(Only Video)

DVI-D output

terminal

Monitor with DVI-D

(HDCP compatible)

C

(Only Video)

C

(Only Video)

Monitor with DVI-D

(HDCP incompatible)

24P DVI-D cable

(commercially available)

DVD player

Monitor equipped with

DVI-D input connectors

To play back the digital video and audio of DVD video and DVD audio through an HDMI/DVI-D connection, both the connected player and monitor are required to support a copyright protection system called HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System).

HDCP is copy protection technology that comprises data encryption and authentication of the partner equipment. The AVR-5805 supports HDCP. Please see the user’s manual of your video display for more information about this.

Copyright Protection System

16

Connecting the antenna terminals

1

4

2

3

DIRECTION OF BROADCASTING STATION

75 Ω/ohms COAXIAL CABLE

FM ANTENNA

FM INDOOR

ANTENNA

(Supplied)

AM LOOP ANTENNA

(Supplied)

AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

GROUND

AM loop antenna assembly

Connect to the AM antenna terminals.

Remove the vinyl tie and take out the connection line.

Bend in the reverse direction.

a. With the antenna

on top any stable surface.

b. With the antenna

attached to a wall.

Mount

Installation hole Mount on wall, etc.

• An F-type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly.

Connection of AM antennas

1. Push the lever. 2. Insert the conductor. 3. Return the lever.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

Notes:

• Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.

• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM loop antenna.

• Make sure AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.

Connecting the external input (EXT. IN) jacks

•AVR-5805 is equipped with two analog external input terminals for 9.1 channels and 5.1 channels.

• These jacks are for inputting multi-channel audio signals from an outboard decoder, or a component with a different type of multi-channel decoder, such as a DVD Audio player, or a multi-channel SACD player, or other future multi-channel sound format decoder.

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.

LRL

R

L

R

LRL

R

L

R

Decoder with 10-, 8- or 6-channel analog output

Front

Surround back

Surround A

Subwoofer

Center

For instructions on playback using the external input (EXT. IN) jacks, see page 128.

See pages 60, 61 for “Setting the EXT.IN Setup”.

Surround B

Surround

Subwoofer

Front

Center

Decoder with 6-channel analog output

17

Connecting the ZONE2 jacks

L

R

L

OUTPUT

INPUT

AUX OUT

Another room

RC-616

INFRARED RETRANSMITTER

Power amplifier

RC-617

INFRARED SENSOR

Extension jacks for future use.

For instructions on operations using the MULTI ZONE jacks, see pages 151~165. See pages 155, 156 for the connection method of Zone3 and Zone4.

Connecting a component with video and audio jacks to the V.AUX input jacks

•To connect the video signal, connect using a 75 Ω/ohms video signal cable cord.

R VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUTOPTICAL L

OUTPUT

R VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUTL

OUTPUT

LINE OUT

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO OUT

LINE OUT

DIGITAL OUT

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO OUT

L R

R

L

R

L

Connecting a Video game component

• Connect the Video game component’s output jacks to this unit’s V. AUX INPUT jacks.

Video game Video camera

Connecting a video camera component

• Connect the video camera component’s output jacks to this unit’s V. AUX INPUT jacks.

TRIGGER OUT

Turn the DC 12V voltage on and off for the individual functions and surround modes. For details, see “Setting the Trigger Out”. (See pages 107, 108)

CONTROL terminal

These terminals are used for an exteral controller. Perform the following operation before using an external controller connected to the RS-232C terminal:

1. Press the ON/STANDBY button on the main unit and set the unit to the operating mode.

2. Perform the operation to turn off the power from the external control.

3. Check that the product has been set to the standby mode.

After checking the above, check the connections of the external controller. Operation is possible.

TV

2 ZONE2 preout CONNECTIONS

• If another power amplifier or pre-main (integrated) amplifier is connected, the Zone2 preout (variable level) jacks can be used to play a different program source in Zone2 the same time. (See page 152)

• The Zone2 video out is only use for the Zone2.

• The connection diagram below is an example of multi-channel playback in Zone2. Please see page 154 when you would like to have 2-channel playback in Zone2.

18

2 DENON LINK Setting

When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK” with the System Setup Digital In Assignment. (See pages 58, 59)

• When the input mode is AUTO and the signals are not be able to transferred by DENON LINK, the unit automatically changes over the input to the selected signals (ANALOG, EXT. IN or IEEE1394).

1

Assign DENON LINK to the input source.

q Select the input source.

　３−１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　　　：　ＤＬＩＮＫ　　　　　：　ＯＰＴ６　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ３　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ４　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ５　　ＤＬＩＮＫ　　　　：　ＯＰＴ１　　　Ｎｏ　Ｓｉｇｎａｌ　　　　：　ＯＰＴ２　　　　ＥＸＴ−１　　　　：　ＯＰＴ３　　　　：　ＯＰＴ４　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ１　　　　　：　ＯＰＴ５

Ye s

CD Tape DVD V.Aux VDP

TV DBS

VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4

2

　３−１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　　　：　ＤＬＩＮＫ　　　　　：　ＯＰＴ６　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ３　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ４　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ５　　ＤＬＩＮＫ　　　　：　ＯＰＴ１　　　Ｎｏ　Ｓｉｇｎａｌ　　　　：　ＯＰＴ２　　　　　Ｉ１　　　　：　ＯＰＴ３　　　ＤＶＤ−３９１０　　　　：　ＯＰＴ４　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ１　　　　　：　ＯＰＴ５

Ye s

CD Tape DVD V.Aux VDP

TV DBS

VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4

CH SEL ENTER

2 Playback using the DENON LINK connector

Digital transfer and multi-channel playback of DVD audio discs and other multi-channel sources is possible by connecting the AVR-5805 to a DENON DVD player equipped with a DENON LINK connector using the connection cable included with the DVD player.

CH SEL

ENTER

w Select “DLINK”.

CH SEL ENTER

CH SEL

ENTER

w Select input signal (ANALOG, EXT.IN or IEEE1394).

DVD : DLINK

*Digital In NoSig.: I1

*Digital In

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

DENON LINK connections

• High quality digital sound with reduced digital signal transfer loss can be enjoyed by connecting a separately sold DENON LINK compatible DVD Player.

DVD player

Select the input for the playback of signals that cannot be transferred by DENON LINK.

q Select “DLINK” setting.

19

2 IEEE1394 network

q Up to 17 devices can be connected using daisy chain type connections. w Up to 63 devices can be connected using tree type connections.

Do not loop the connections.

e Select IEEE 1394 input. “LINK CHECK” will be displayed while the IEEE 1394 connection is being checked. r If the connection is looped, “LOOP CONNECT” is displayed. Check the connections and undo the loop.

Connecting IEEE1394 devices

• Use an S400-compatible 4-pin IEEE1394 cable to connect.

•Video signals are not transferred with the AVR-5805’s IEEE1394 interface, so when connecting a video device connect the video signals as well.

• Assign the IEEE1394 input the input source. (See page 65)

DVD player

20

Speaker system connections

• Connect the speaker terminals with the speakers making sure that like polarities are matched (< with < , > with >). Mismatching of polarities will result in weak central sound, unclear orientation of the various instruments, and the sense of direction of the stereo being impaired.

• When making connections, take care that none of the individual conductors of the speaker cord come in contact with adjacent terminals, with other speaker cord conductors, or with the rear panel.

Speaker Impedance

• Speakers with an impedance from 6 to 16 Ω/ohms can be connected.

•The protector circuit may be activated if the set is played for long periods of time at high volumes when speakers with an impedance lower than the specified impedance are connected.

NOTE: NEVER touch the speaker terminals when the power is on. Doing so could result in electric shocks.

Connecting the speaker cords

1. Loosen by turning counterclockwise.

2. Insert the cord. 3. Tighten by turning clockwise.

Either tightly twist or terminate the core wires.

Connecting banana plugs

Turn clockwise to tighten, then insert the banana plug.

Protector circuit

• This unit is equipped with a high-speed protection circuit. The purpose of this circuit is to protect the speakers under circumstances such as when the output of the power amplifier is inadvertently short-circuited and a large current flows, when the temperature surrounding the unit becomes unusually high, or when the unit is used at high output over a long period which results in an extreme temperature rise. When the protection circuit is activated, the speaker output is cut off and the power supply indicator LED flashes. Should this occur, please follow these steps: be sure to switch off the power of this unit, check whether there are any faults with the wiring of the speaker cables or input cables, and wait for the unit to cool down if it is very hot. Improve the ventilation condition around the unit and switch the power back on. If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no problems with the wiring or the ventilation around the unit, switch off the power and contact a DENON service center.

Note on speaker impedance

• The protector circuit may be activated if the set is played for long periods of time at high volumes when speakers with an impedance lower than the specified impedance (for example speakers with an impedance of lower than 4 Ω/ohms) are connected. If the protector circuit is activated, the speaker output is cut off. Turn off the set’s power, wait for the set to cool down, improve the ventilation around the set, then turn the power back on.

Cooling fan

• The AVR-5805 is equipped with a cooling fan to prevent the temperature inside the set from rising. The fan is activated under certain usage conditions. It is temperature sensitive, to minimize or prevent audible fan noise.

21

Connections

• By default, the speaker system setting is set to 9.1 channels.

• The output of each power amplifier can be assigned to any desired channel to best suit the application. For details, refer to “Setting the Channel Setup” and “Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment”. (See pages 97~105)

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.

IN

(L) (L) (R) (R)

(L) (R) (L) (R)

Connection jack for subwoofer with built-in amplifier (subwoofer), etc.

SURROUND SPEAKER

SYSTEMS (A)

CENTER SPEAKER SYSTEMFRONT SPEAKER SYSTEMS

• Precautions when connecting speakers

If a speaker is placed near a TV or video monitor, the colors on the screen may be disturbed by the speaker’s magnetism. If this should happen, move the speaker away to a position where it does not have this effect.

SURROUND SPEAKER

SYSTEMS (B)

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

NOTE:

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to left channel (L5).

22

6

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Front Panel

• For details on the functions of these parts, refer to the pages given in parentheses ( ).

!4 !3 !2 !1 !0

q w e r t y u i o

!5 !6 !7 !8

!9

@0

@1%4

#8 $0 $2 $3#6

#5#3 #7 #9 $1

#4 $8$6$4 %0

%1 %3$9$7$5

%2

@3@2 @4 @5 @6 @9@8@7 #0 #1 #2

23

q

Power ON/STANDBY switch.................................................(125)

w

Power indicator......................................................................(125)

e

Power switch.................................................................(125, 173)

r

Headphones jack (PHONES)..................................................(130)

t

V.AUX INPUT jacks ..................................................................(17)

y

SETUP MIC jack ......................................................................(32)

u

USER MODE 1 button...........................................................(146)

i

USER MODE 2 button...........................................................(146)

o

USER MODE 3 button...........................................................(146)

!0

MASTER VOLUME control....................................................(127)

!1

Master volume indicator........................................................(127)

!2

Display

!3

Remote control sensor ..........................................................(113)

!4

FUNCTION knob ...................................(126, 132, 133, 157, 168)

!5

SOURCE button.....................................................................(126)

!6

TUNING PRESET button........................................................(168)

!7

ZONE2 SELECT button..........................................................(157)

!8

ZONE3/4/REC SELECT button ..............................(132, 133, 157)

!9

Multi Zone power indicators..................................................(158)

@0

Input source indicators ..........................................................(126)

@1

MultEQ XT indicator ..............................................................(130)

@2

STANDARD button........................................................(140~144)

@3

HOME THX CINEMA button .........................................(137, 139)

@4

9CH STEREO button .............................................................(148)

@5

DSP SIMULATION button .....................................................(148)

@6

SYSTEM SETUP button...........................................................(26)

@7

CH SELECT/ENTER button......................................(26, 134, 135)

@8

SURROUND PARAMETER button.........................................(137)

@9

CINEMA button .............................................................(142, 144)

#0

MUSIC button................................................................(142, 144)

#1

GAME button.........................................................................(142)

#2

ROOM EQ button..................................................................(130)

#3

PURE DIRECT button ............................................................(129)

#4

VIDEO SELECT button ..........................................................(130)

#5

DIRECT/STEREO button........................................................(129)

#6

MONITOR SELECT button ....................................................(131)

#7

INPUT MODE button.............................................................(126)

#8

SCALE button ........................................................................(132)

#9

ANALOG button.....................................................................(126)

$0

DIMMER button ....................................................................(131)

$1

EXT.IN button.................................................................(126, 128)

$2

VIDEO ON/OFF button ..........................................................(129)

$3

CURSOR button.......................................................................(26)

$4

MODE button ................................................................(165, 166)

$5

TONE CONTROL button........................................................(150)

$6

BAND button .................................................................(165, 166)

$7

TONE DEFEAT button ...........................................................(150)

$8

MEMORY button...................................................................(167)

$9

SURROUND SPEAKER button ..............................................(131)

%0

TUNING down (–) button...............................................(165, 166)

%1

SURROUND BACK button.............................................(139, 140)

%2

TUNING up (+) button ...................................................(165, 166)

%3

STATUS button ......................................................................(131)

%4

Extension indicator for future use

24

Display

u yo!0!1!3!2!4!6!7!8 !5 i

e

r t

q

w

q

INPUT SIGNAL indicator

The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal.

w

INPUT SIGNAL CHANNEL indicator

The channels included in the input source will light. This lights when the digital signal is inputted.

e

Information display

This displays the surround mode, function name or setting value, etc.

r

OUTPUT SIGNAL CHANNEL indicator

The audio channels output from this unit will light.

t

SPEAKER indicator

This lights corresponding to the settings of the surround speakers of the various surround modes.

y

Decoder indicator

This lights when each decoder is operating.

u

MASTER VOLUME indicator

This displays the volume level. The Setup item number is displayed in System Setup.

i

IEEE1394 indicator

This lights during playback in a IEEE1394 connection.

o

MULTI (ZONE) indicator

ZONE3 mode is selected in ZONE3/REC SELECT.

!0

REC OUT SOURCE indicator.

REC OUT mode is selected in ZONE3/REC SELECT.

!1

DENON LINK indicator

This lights during playback in a DENON LINK connection.

!2

V.OFF indicator This lights when the operation of the video circuit has been turned off.

!3

AL24 indicator

The AL24 indicator lights when the PURE DIRECT, DIRECT, STEREO, MULTI CH PURE DIRECT , MULTI CH DIRECT, MULTI CH IN mode is selected in the PCM input signal.

!4

INPUT MODE indicator

This lights corresponding to the setting of the INPUT mode.

!5

RDS indicator

This lights when RDS broadcast has been received.

!6

AUTO indicator

This lights when the broadcast station is selected in the AUTO tuning mode.

!7

TUNED indicator

This lights when an FM/AM broadcast has been received.

!8

STEREO indicator

This lights when an FM stereo broadcast has been received.

25

RC-995

Remote control unit

• For details on the functions of these parts, refer to the pages given in parentheses ( ).

Cursor buttons........................................(26)

Power buttons......................................(125)

10KEY/SYSTEM CALL button ..............(114)

SURROUND PARAMETER button

.....................................................(137, 162)

Master volume control buttons....(127, 158)

ON SCREEN button .............(131, 138, 158)

INPUT MODE selector buttons

.............................................(126~128, 158)

VIDEO SELECT button.................(130, 158)

Tuner system buttons..................(167~172)

SYSTEM buttons..........................(114, 115)

Input source button..............................(114)

Mode selector buttons.........................(114)

Remote control signal transmitter........(113)

SYSTEM buttons..................................(158)

MUTING button............................(130, 158)

Surround mode button .........................(114)

SYSTEM SETUP button .................(26, 159)

ROOM EQ button ................................(130)

CH SELECT/ENTER button

...............................(26, 134, 135, 160, 161)

SCALE button.......................................(132)

SPEAKER button ..................................(131)

TEST TONE button.......................(134, 159)

MONITOR SELECT button...................(131)

Tuner system buttons..................(165~173)

SYSTEM buttons..........(114, 115, 117, 118)

26

7

SYSTEM SETUP

• Once all connections with other AV components have been completed as described in “CONNECTIONS” (see pages 9~21), make the various settings described below on the monitor screen using the AVR-5805’s on-screen display function. These settings are required to set up the listening room’s AV system centered around the AVR-5805.

SYSTEM SETUP button

Press this to display the system setup menu.

ENTER button

Press this to switch the display. Also use this button to complete the setting.

CURSOR buttons

Use these to move the cursors the left, right, up and down on the screen.

1

Check that the remote control unit set to AMP mode.

2

2 Use the following buttons to set up the system

2 System setup items and default values (set upon shipment from the factory)

1. Auto Setup/Room EQ

Auto Setup / Room EQ Default settings

1

Auto Setup

Room EQ Setup

2

Direct Mode Setup

4

Set the ON/OFF setting of Room EQ, in the case of the surround mode is in Direct or Pure Direct.

3

Mic Input Select

Set this to switch the Mic Input jack for use for Mic or V.AUX Lchannel input jack.

This unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and measures the acoustic characteristics of your room to permit an appropriate automatic setting.

Set the Room EQ setting with All or Assign for each surround mode.

–

All, Room EQ = OFF

OFF

Mic

Page

33~39

40, 41

41

42, 43

NOTES:

• The AVR-5805’s on-screen display function is designed for use with high resolution monitor TVs, so it may be difficult to read small characters on TVs with small screens or low resolutions.

• The setup menu is not displayed when headphones are being used.

27

3. Audio Input Setup

Audio Input Setup Default settings Page

58, 59

Digital In Assign

This assigns the digital input jacks for the different input sources.

Input

source

Digital Inputs

CD DVD VDP TV DBS VCR-1 VCR-2

COAX 1 COAX 2 COAX 3 COAX 4 COAX 5 OPT 1

OPT 2

1

CDR/TAPE

OPT 5

VCR-3 VCR-4

OPT 3 OPT 4

V.AUX

OPT 6

2

EXT.IN Setup Set the Ext.In terminal playback method.

EXT.IN-1

Setup

EXT.IN-2

Setup

Mode = DSP, Surr.B = NOT USED, S.Back = NOT USED,

SW Level = +15 dB, Input ATT. = OFF

Mode = DSP, SW Level = +15 dB, Input ATT. = OFF

62

Input Function Lev.

The playback level is corrected individually for the different input sources.

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR/ TAPE

DVD VDP TV

0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

3

VCR-2

0 dB

DBS VCR-1

0 dB 0 dB

VCR-3

0 dB

VCR-4

0 dB

V.AUX

0 dB

4

Function Rename

The names of the different input source can be changed as desired and displayed on the display.

63, 64

5

IEEE1394 Assign

The connected IEEE1394 device can be automatically identified to assign the input source.

–65

6

IEEE1394 Auto Func.

Set the function for associating playback of the connected IEEE1394 device on or off.

Auto Function = OFF 66

7

Tuner Presets

FM stations are received automatically and stored in the memory.

A1 ~ A8

B1 ~B8

C1 ~C8

D1 ~D8

E1 ~E8

87.5/89.1/98.1/107.9/90.1/90.1/90.1/90.1 MHz

520/600/1000/1400/1500/1710 kHz, 90.1/90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

Auto Preset Memory

F1 ~F8

G1 ~G8

90.1 MHz

Preset channels that are not used often can be skipped.

Preset Skip

The preset channels can be given the names you want.

Preset Name

67

All preset channels = OFF 68

– 69, 70

60, 61

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR/ TAPE

DVD VDP TV

VCR-2DBS VCR-1 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX

2. Speaker Setup

Speaker Setup Default settings

1

3

Speaker Configuration

Channel Level

Input the combination of speakers in your system and their corresponding sizes (SMALL for regular speakers, LARGE for fullsize, full-range) to automatically set the composition of the signals output from the speakers and the frequency response.

This adjusts the volume of the signals output from the speakers and subwoofer for the different channels in order to obtain optimum effects.

Front Sp.

Small

Center Sp.

Surround Sp.

A / B

Subwoofer

Small SmallYe s

Front L & R Center

Surround L & R (A)

Subwoofer

12 ft (3.6 m) 12 ft (3.6 m) 10 ft (3.0 m)12 ft (3.6 m)

Front L Front R Center

Surround

R (A)

Surround

R (B)

Subwoofer

0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

0 dB

Surround Back

Sp.

Small / 2spkrs

4

Delay Time

This parameter is for optimizing the timing with which the audio signals are produced from the speakers and subwoofer according to the listening position.

Surround L & R (B)

10 ft (3.0 m)

Surround

L (B)

0 dB

Surround

L (A)

0 dB

Crossover Frequency

Set the frequency (Hz) below which the bass sound of the various speakers is to be output from the subwoofer.

5

FIXED —THX—

Page

46, 47

2

Subwoofer Setup

This selects the subwoofer for playing deep bass signals. LFE —THX— 48

49, 50

51, 52

53, 54

Surround Speaker Setup

Use this function when using multiple surround speaker combinations for more ideal surround sound. Once the combinations of surround speakers to be used for the different surround modes are preset, the surround speakers are selected automatically according to the surround mode.

Surround

mode

Surround

speaker

THX/DOLBY/

DTS

CINEMA

THX/DOLBY/

DTS

MUSIC

WIDE

SCREEN

9 CH

STEREO

DSP

SIMULATION

MULTI CH

MODE

AAAA+B A+B A+B A

6

THX/DOLBY

GAME

55

7

THX Audio Setup

When using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer, set the subwoofer’s frequency response.

THX Ultra2 Subwoofer = NO

Boundary Gain compensation

Surround Back Speaker Position

When using two surround back speakers, set the distance of the two speakers.

The Distance Between SBL/SBR = 0 ft to 1 ft (0 m to 0.3 m)

56

Surround

Back

10 ft (3.0 m)

Surround

Back R

0 dB

Surround

Back L

0 dB

4. Video Setup

Video Setup Default settings

1

3

Component In Assign

HDMI/DVI In Assign

This assigns the color difference (component) video input jacks for the different input sources.

The HDMI or DVI input terminals are assigned for the different input sources. Select HDMI or DVI for the monitor output terminal. Select the HDMI audio signal playback method.

DVD VDP TV

5

Video Scaler

Make the settings related to video output (resolution and aspect rate conversion).

Audio Delay Set the audio delay timing to synchronize the sound and video.

6

0 ms

Page

71, 72

2

Video Convert Mode

Set the input signal to be output from the monitor output terminal. AUTO 72, 73

73, 74

75, 76

76, 77

On Screen Display

This sets whether or not to display the on-screen display that appears on the monitor screen when the controls on the remote control unit or main unit are operated.

7

Function/Mode = ON, Master Volume = ON, Mode = Mode 1 77, 78

DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX

1-RCA 2-RCA 3-RCA 4-RCA 5-RCA 6-BNC NONE NONE NONE

Aspect = FULL, Resolution = 480i / 576i

DVD VDP TV

DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.AUX

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

4

3D Y/C Separation

This setting sets the action detection sensitivity of the 3-dimensional Y/C separation at the time of the video signal up-conversion to SVideo.

74Motion Detection = MID

57

28

6. Zone Setup

Zone Setup Default settings

1

3

Speaker Configuration

Channel Level

The components of the signals output from the various speakers and the frequency response can be set automatically inside the set by inputting the existence/absence of combinations of speakers and their size (corresponding to their low frequency playback capability) for the speakers used in Zone2 during surround playback in Zone2.

This adjusts the volume of the signal output from the various speakers and subwoofer used in Zone2.

Front Sp.

Small

Center Sp. Surround Sp.Subwoofer

Small SmallYes

Front L & R Center Surround L & RSubwoofer

12 ft (3.6 m) 12 ft (3.6 m) 10 ft (3.0 m)12 ft (3.6 m)

Front L Front R Center Surround R Subwoofer

0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB

4

Delay Time

This parameter is for optimizing the timing of the sound produced from the various speakers and subwoofer according to the listening position in Zone2.

Surround L

0.0 dB

Crossover Frequency

Set the frequency (in Hz) below which deep bass appearing in the main channels will be routed to the Zone2 subwoofer.

5

80 Hz

Page

86

2

Subwoofer Mode

This selects the subwoofer used in Zone2 for playing the low base sound.

LFE 87

88, 89

90, 91

92

Video Setup

Set the input signal to be output from the Zone2 monitor out terminal.

Video Convert Mode

Audio Delay

6

93, 94

7

Zone3/4 Tone/Ch.Lev.

Adjust the tone and channel level of the sound output from Zone3 and Zone4.

Bass = 0 dB, Treble = 0 dB, HPF = OFF, L/R = 0 dB

95, 96

Set the delay time the sound is synchronized with the picture which are outputted in Zone2.

AUTO

0 ms 94

Zone3

Zone4

Bass = 0 dB, Treble = 0 dB, HPF = OFF, L/R = 0 dB

5. Advanced Playback

Advanced Playback Default settings

1

2

2ch Direct/Stereo

Auto Surround Mode

Turn the audio compression on or off when down-mixing Dolby Digital signals.

3

Dolby Digital Setup

The speaker settings can be changed specifically for playing in the 2channel direct or stereo mode.

Set the Auto surround mode function.

Basic

OFF

Auto Surround Mode = ON

Page

79

80

81

7. Option Setup

Option Setup Default settings

1

3

Channel Setup

Trigger Out Setup

The number of channels that you wish to play back in each zone are assigned to each zone accordingly.

This sets the Trigger Out output for the different input sources. If “Zone=Main” is selected, settings can be made for the individual surround modes.

Main Zone

9.1 CH

Zone2 Zone4Zone3

5.1 CH StereoStereo

4

Volume Control

AC Outlet Assign

This sets the AC outlets to on or off for the different input sources.

5

Page

97~100

2

Power Amp Assign

Power Amplifiers can be assigned to the various channels according to your system’s requirements.

Normal

101~105

107, 108

6

Setup Memory/Lock

–110, 111

L1FLL2CL3

SLAL4SLBL5SBLR1FRR2–R3SRAR4SRBR5SBR

This sets the volume level of each zone output.

Volume Limit: This sets the upper limit for the

master volume.

Power On Level: This sets the volume level upon

switching on the power of each zone.

Mute Level: This sets the amount of attenuation

of the audio output when each zone is muted.

Volume Level: This se ts whether the output level

of Zone2 to 4 is fixed or variable.

106, 107

Vol.Limit = OFF, P. On Lev. = LAST, Mute Lev. = FULL

Vol.Lev. = VAR, Vol.Limit = OFF, P. On Lev. = LAST, Mute Lev. = FULL

Trigger

Out 1

ZONE = MAIN, All Surround Modes = ON

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR/ TAPE

DVD VDP TV

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON

VCR-2

ON

DBS VCR-1

ON ON

VCR-3ONVCR-4ONV.AUX

ON

Trigger

Out 2

ZONE = 2

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR/ TAPE

DVD VDP TV

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

VCR-2

ON

DBS VCR-1

ON ON

VCR-3ONVCR-4ONV.AUX

ON

Trigger

Out 3

ZONE = 3

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR/ TAPE

DVD VDP TV

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

VCR-2

ON

DBS VCR-1

ON ON

VCR-3ONVCR-4ONV.AUX

ON

Trigger

Out 4

ZONE = 4

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR/ TAPE

DVD VDP TV

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

VCR-2

ON

DBS VCR-1

ON ON

VCR-3ONVCR-4ONV.AUX

ON

109, 110

AC Outlet

1~3

ZONE = MAIN

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR/ TAPE

DVD VDP TV

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

VCR-2

ON

DBS VCR-1

ON ON

VCR-3ONVCR-4ONV.AUX

ON

This stores the current user settings in the memory.

User Memory

This sets whether or not to lock the system setup settings so that thay cannot be changed.

Setup Lock

Setup Lock = OFF

MAIN

ZONE2

ZONE3

ZONE4

111, 112

4

This parameter is for optimizing the Room EQ with which the audio signals are produced from the speakers.

Manual EQ Setup

All Channels and Frequency=0dB 82~84

29

2 Speaker system layout

Basic system layout (For a THX Ultra2 system)

• The following is an example of the basic layout for a system consisting of eight speaker systems and a television monitor:

Subwoofer Center speaker system

Surround speaker systems

Surround back speaker systems

Front speaker systems Set these at the sides of the TV or screen with their front surfaces as flush with the front of the screen as possible.

• Surround speaker selector function This function makes it possible to achieve the optimum sound fields for different sources by switching between two systems of surround speakers (A and B). The settings of the different speakers (A only, B only or A+B) are stored in the memory for the different surround modes, so they are set automatically when the surround mode is selected.

AA

BB

AA

BB

SB SB SB SB

Using A only

(Multi surround speaker system)

Using B only

(Single surround speaker system)

(SB: Surround Back Speakers)

Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema,THX Music mode and THX Games mode. Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers. It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers (front left (FL) and front right (FR), surround left (SL) and surround right (SR), surround back left (SBL) and surround back right (SBR)) is less than 2 ft (60 cm).

With the AVR-5805 it is also possible to use the surround speaker selector function to choose the best layout for a variety of sources and surround modes.

Example w:

*

M

30

Before setting up the system

1

2

Check that all the connections are correct, then turn on the main unit’s power. Setup will not be possible when the unit is set to Pure Direct ON, the Video Off mode, or when the headphones are plugged in. Therefore, please cancel the mode or reverse the condition.

Display the System Setup Menu.

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ　　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｎｕ

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Auto Set/RoomEQ

*System Setup

NOTES:

• The System Setup menu composition is of a layered design that includes the related items below the large table title as contained in the tables of pages 26~28.

• Wherever your position in System Setup, one more press of the System Setup button permits a move to one level higher.

Auto Setup / Room EQ

The Auto Setup and Room EQ function of this unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and measures the acoustic characteristics of your room to permit an appropriate automatic setting. The AVR-5805’s Audyssey MultEQ XT function has the feature that it provides the optimum listening environment at all listening positions in the home theater, where there are often multiple listeners viewing programs together. To achieve this, it is first necessary to use a microphone to measure test tones generated from the different speakers at the various listening positions. All this measured data is analyzed with a unique method to comprehensively improve acoustic characteristics in the listening area. For optimum effectiveness, measurements should be performed at six or more points. Move the microphone successively within the listening area surrounded by the speakers as shown on the diagram below to measure the test tones. When listening to music or viewing movies with the whole family, move the microphone successively to the different positions in which the members of the family sit (“ ” on the diagram indicates the points of installation) and measure repeatedly (Example q). Even if the number of people using the home theater is small, taking multiple measurements at or near the listening positions makes it possible to correct the sound more effectively (Example w). The AVR-5805’s Room EQ function offers three correction curves: “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat”. These can be selected after performing the auto setup procedure. Details of the different correction curves are described below.

Audyssey : This adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics. Front : This adjusts the characteristics of each speaker to the characteristics of the front speakers. Flat : This the frequency response of all speakers flat.

This is suitable for multi-channel music reproduction, from discrete music sources such as Dolby Digital 5.1, DTS, DVD-Audio and SACD.

About the main listening position (*M) The main listening position is the point where a listener sits most often or the listening position when only one person is listening. Measurements on the AVR-5805 start from this point. Correction for the speaker distance (“Delay Time”) is set based on this point.

When performing Auto Setup, an optional microphone is required for setup.

Example q:

*

M

31

2 Measurement flow

I. Connect the microphone to be used for the auto setup procedure.

Please place the measuring microphone at ear height at the main listening position.

III. Preliminary measurement items

q Measuring the background noise (noise in the room) w Determining whether or not speakers are connected (speaker detection) e Checking the polarities of the speakers

NOTE:

•A moderately loud test tone is output during the measurement. Please consider this should you be planning night time measurements, and consider not allowing small children into the listening time.

II. Extra Setup

q Channel Setup

w Power Amp Assign

By default, the speaker system setting is set to 9.1 channels. Please set under “Extra Setup”, only when you want to change this arrangement.

III. Check the results of the speaker detection.

IV.Speaker system measurement items

q Speaker Configuration : This sets the speaker bass reproduction ability. w Delay Time : This sets the optimum delay time from each speaker corresponding to the listening position. e Channel Level : This sets the volume that is output from each speaker. r Crossover Frequency : This set the frequency (Hz) below which the bass sound of the various speakers is to be output from

the subwoofer.

t Room EQ : This sets the frequency response of each speaker.

(Main (1st) listening position)

Continue measuring ?

Select “OK Next” and put the microphone at next point.

Quit measuring ?

Select “Calculate”.

V. Check the results of the speaker system measurements.

V. Store the measurement results in the memory.

Move the microphone to the 2nd to 8th listening positions and repeat the measurement.

   

32

Before performing the Auto Setup procedure

1

Check again that the speakers are securely connected to the AVR-5805.

2

Set the volume to halfway and set the crossover frequency to the maximum or Low pass filter off if your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency. Some subwoofers have a standby mode. Be sure to turn this function off before performing the Auto Setup procedure.

3

The auto setup procedure uses the OSD (on-screen display) function, so connect the AVR-5805 to a TV, projector, or other monitor.

I

. Connecting the microphone for Auto Setup

1

Connect the optional microphone for Auto Setup to the Setup Mic connector on the front panel of the unit.

NOTES:

• The optional standard microphone is DENON DM-S305 sold separately.

• When using other microphone, see pages 42, 43.

2

Mount the auto setup microphone onto a camera tripod, etc., and place it at ear height at the main listening position (*) in the listening room with the sound receptor facing the ceiling. When placing the microphone, adjust the height so that the microphone’s sound receptor is at the height of the ears of the listener. Be sure that at the beginning, the measurement is started with the microphone set up at the main listening position.

NOTE:

• Do not disconnect the microphone until the settings are completed.

Microphone

33

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ　　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｎｕ

1

Select “Auto Setup / Room EQ” at the System Setup Menu.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Auto Set/RoomEQ

*System Setup

2

Display the Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Auto Setup

*AutoSet/RoomEQ

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　２．Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｍｉｃ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ　　５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ

Setting the Auto Setup / Room EQ

1

1-1. Setting the Auto Setup

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　２．Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｍｉｃ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ　　５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ

1

Select “Auto Setup” at the Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Auto Setup

*AutoSet/RoomEQ

2

Display the Auto Setup screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

ａｔ　ｅａｒ　ｈｅｉｇｈｔ　ａｔ

Ｐｌｅａｓｅ　ｐｌａｃｅ　ｍｉｃｒｏｐｈｏｎｅ

ｍａｉｎ　ｌｉｓｔｅｎｉｎｇ　ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．

　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　　　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　　　　　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ：９．１ＣＨ

　　　　　　Ｅｘｔｒａ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Start

*Auto Setup

The message “Connect Microphone” is displayed if no microphone is connected. If so, connect the auto setup microphone.

34

II

. Extra Setup

• By default, the speaker system setting is set to 9.1 channels. Perform this setting if you want to change the channel setup to match the speaker system you are using or to conduct the power amplifier assignment procedure. If you do not want to perform this “Extra Setup” procedure, proceed to the “Preliminary measurements” on page 35.

　　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

ａｔ　ｅａｒ　ｈｅｉｇｈｔ　ａｔ

Ｐｌｅａｓｅ　ｐｌａｃｅ　ｍｉｃｒｏｐｈｏｎｅ

ｍａｉｎ　ｌｉｓｔｅｎｉｎｇ　ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．

　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　　　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　　　　　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ：９．１ＣＨ

　　　　　　Ｅｘｔｒａ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

1

Select “Extra Setup”.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Extra Setup

*Auto Setup

2

Press the Cursor left button. Switch to the Extra Setup screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　１−１．Ｅｘｔｒａ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　Ｐｏｗｅｒ　Ａｍｐ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

Channel Setup

*Extra Setup

3

Choose the setting you want to change then press the ENTER button to switch to the setting screen.

• For instructions on making the “Channel Setup” settings, see pages 97~100.

• For instructions on making the “Power Amp Assign” settings, see pages 101~105.

The speakers measured with this Auto Setup procedure are based on the setting of these “Channel Setup” and “Power Amp Assign” functions.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

4

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Once the settings are completed, press the ENTER button at the each setting screen. The Extra Setup Menu re-appears.

5

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button to return to the Auto Setup screen.

35

III

. Preliminary measurements

• This procedure is used to automatically determine the background noise, whether or not speakers are connected, and the polarities of the connected speakers.

　　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

ａｔ　ｅａｒ　ｈｅｉｇｈｔ　ａｔ

Ｐｌｅａｓｅ　ｐｌａｃｅ　ｍｉｃｒｏｐｈｏｎｅ

ｍａｉｎ　ｌｉｓｔｅｎｉｎｇ　ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．

　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　　　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　　　　　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ：９．１ＣＨ

　　　　　　Ｅｘｔｒａ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

1

Select the “Start” and press the Cursor left button. Start the preliminary measurements.

Start

*Auto Setup

2

The screen shown at the right appears once the preliminary measurements are completed. Press the ENTER button to switch the Speaker Detect Check screen.

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

ａｔ　ｅａｒ　ｈｅｉｇｈｔ　ａｔ

Ｐｌｅａｓｅ　ｐｌａｃｅ　ｍｉｃｒｏｐｈｏｎｅ

ｍａｉｎ　ｌｉｓｔｅｎｉｎｇ　ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｄｅｔｅｃｔ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　　　　　　Ｒｅｔｒｙ

　　　　　　　　　ＯＫ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

Sp Detect Check

Cautions when making the measurements:

• It is not possible to measure properly if there are any obstacles between the speakers and microphone. Check that there are no obstacles.

• Please do not stand between or near the speakers and the microphone during the measurements.

•To avoid affecting the measurements, turn off the air-conditioner or any other device that makes noise and take the measurements with the room as quiet as possible.

•Measurement is canceled when MASTER VOLUME is operated while the Auto Setup is performed.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

Check the results of the speaker detection. Press the ENTER button to switch to the second screen. If the check ends, press the ENTER button again.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｄｅｔｅｃｔ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．Ａ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．Ｂ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．Ｂａｃｋ

2spkrs 1spkr

Ye s

No

Ye s

No

Ye s

No

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｄｅｔｅｃｔ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　Ｓｐ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　Ｓｐ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ

Ye s

No

Ye s

No

Ye s

No

[First screen] [Second screen]

NOTE:

• Subsequent measurements will be made based on this data, so be sure to check the results of these measurements. If the results are not as expected or if an error message is displayed, select “Retry” and perform the measurements again. (For details on the error messages, see page 39.) If the results of remeasurement are still not as expected or if an error message is displayed, turn off the power switch and check the speaker connections. Then start the measurements again from the beginning.

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　　　　Ｍｅａｓｕｒｉｎｇ

　　　　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｄｅｔｅｃｔ

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

36

IV

. Speaker system measurement

•With these measurements, the “Speaker Configuration”, “Delay Time”, “Channel Level”, “Crossover Frequency” and “Room EQ” are analyzed automatically. The main listening position is measured first, so leave the microphone where it is.

1

Select the “OK Start” and press the Cursor left button. Measurements for the first point start.

OK Start

Main Position

NOTE:

•With these measurements, test tones are not output from channels to which speakers have been judged not to be connected in the preliminary measurements. Do not change the connection of speakers or the subwoofer’s volume after performing the preparation measurements and before performing these measurements.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

2

q The screen shown at the right appears once the measurements for the main listening

position are completed. Next the measurements for the second point will be taken. Place the microphone at the second listening position. For instructions on the position in which the microphone should be placed, see page 30. (When making the measurements, be sure to position the microphone at the approximate ear height of the seated listener(s).)

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

ａｔ　ｅａｒ　ｈｅｉｇｈｔ　ａｔ

Ｐｌｅａｓｅ　ｐｌａｃｅ　ｍｉｃｒｏｐｈｏｎｅ

２ｎｄ　ｌｉｓｔｅｎｉｎｇ　ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｌｃｕｌａｔｅ

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　　　　　　Ｒｅｔｒｙ

　　　　　　　　　ＯＫ　Ｎｅｘｔ

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　　　　Ｍｅａｓｕｒｉｎｇ

　　　　　２ｎｄ　Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

w Select the “OK Next” and press the Cursor left

button. Measurements for the second point start.

OK Next

2nd Position

3

Perform step 2 repeatedly. The more measurement points, the better the resulting room correction effect. We recommend a minimum of 6 measurement points – 8 measurement points provides the best room correction effect.

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

ａｔ　ｅａｒ　ｈｅｉｇｈｔ　ａｔ

Ｐｌｅａｓｅ　ｐｌａｃｅ　ｍｉｃｒｏｐｈｏｎｅ

ｍａｉｎ　ｌｉｓｔｅｎｉｎｇ　ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｄｅｔｅｃｔ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　　　　　　Ｒｅｔｒｙ

　　　　　　　　　ＯＫ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　　　　Ｍｅａｓｕｒｉｎｇ

　　　　　Ｍａｉｎ　Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

37

5

Once the calculations are completed, a screen for confirming the results of the measurements appears.

4

After measuring at the number of points according to your listening environment, select “Calculate” and press the Cursor left button. The speaker system is analyzed.

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

ａｔ　ｅａｒ　ｈｅｉｇｈｔ　ａｔ

Ｐｌｅａｓｅ　ｐｌａｃｅ　ｍｉｃｒｏｐｈｏｎｅ

７ｔｈ　ｌｉｓｔｅｎｉｎｇ　ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ．

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｌｃｕｌａｔｅ

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　　　　　　Ｒｅｔｒｙ

　　　　　　　　　ＯＫ　Ｎｅｘｔ

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　　　Ｃａｌｃｕｌａｔｉｎｇ

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

Calculate

7th Position

The amount of time required for the analysis depends on the number of speakers and the number of measuring points. The greater the number of speakers and measuring points, the longer the time required. For example, for 9.1channel systems and 6 measuring points, the calculations require approximately 5 minutes. Measurements can be ended when there are 5 or more measurement locations; however, to obtain better results, measurements at 6 or more locations is recommended.

38

V

. Check of the measurement result

• The results of the measured items can be checked. For instructions on checking the equalizer parameters, see pages 43~45.

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｏｒｅ

1

Select the items. The measurement results of each item can be checked here.

Sp Config.Check

*Auto Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

2

Press the ENTER button and display the verification screen. Press the ENTER button to switch to the second screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

[Delay Time Check]

NOTE:

• When measurements have been made using the measurement microphone, speakers with a built-in filter such as subwoofers might be set with a value that differs from the physical distance because of the internal electrical delay.

　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

[Channel Level Check]

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　Ｓｐ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　Ｓｐ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ

Ye s

No

Large

Small

Small None

[Speaker Config. Check]

　　Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ａ　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ａ　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ｂ　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ｂ　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＬ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＲ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ａ　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ａ　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ｂ　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ｂ　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＬ　　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＲ　　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．Ａ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．Ｂ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．Ｂａｃｋ

Small None

Small

2spkrs 1spkr

None

Small None

3

If the check ends, press the ENTER button again.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｏｒｅ

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

4

Select whether or not to save the data you have checked. Select the following items based on the measurement results.

Store : Set with the checked measurement value. Cancel : If you do not want to set the contents

you have checked, cancel the auto setup settings.

Store

*Auto Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ａ　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｂ　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓ．Ｂａｃｋ　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐

Small Small Small Small Small

[Crossover Freq. Check]

39

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

5

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｓｔｏｒｉｎｇ　　　　　　　Ｍｅａｓｕｒｉｎｇ

When “Store” is selected, all parameters are stored up. After the data is stored, the “Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu” screen appears automatically.

NOTE:

• Do not turn off the power while the data is being stored. If the power is turned off while the data is being stored, the Room EQ parameters stored in the memory will be cleared, and it will not be possible to select the “Audyssey”, “Front” or “Flat” equalizer settings.

About the error message

• These error messages will be displayed when performing the measurements of Auto Setup and the automatic measurements can not be completed because of the speaker arrangement, measurement environment, or other factors. Please check the following matters, reset the pertinent items, and measure again. Be sure to turn off the AVR-5805’s power before checking the speaker connections.

Screen example

　　　　　　　　　ＥＲＲＯＲ！

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｌ／Ｒ：Ｎｏｎｅ

　　　　　　　　　　　Ｒｅｔｒｙ　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Cause Measures

• The speakers required for producing suitable reproduction have not been detected. q The front L and front R speakers were not properly

detected.

w Only one channel of the surround (A) and surround

(B) speakers was detected.

e Sound was output from the R channel when only

one surround back speaker was connected.

r The surround back or the surround (B) speaker

was detected, but the surround (A) speaker was

not detected. If multiple errors occur, use the cursor left and right buttons to check the contents.

• Check that the pertinent speakers are properly connected.

　　　　　　　　　ＥＲＲＯＲ！

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｌ　：Ｐｈａｓｅ

　　　　　　　　　　　Ｒｅｔｒｙ　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｋｉｐ

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

• The speaker polarity is connected in reverse.

If multiple errors occur, use the cursor left and right buttons to check the contents.

• Check the polarity of the pertinent speakers.

• For some speakers, the screen below may be displayed even though the speakers are properly connected. If so, select “Skip0”.

　　　　　　　　　ＥＲＲＯＲ！

　　　　Ａｍｂｉｅｎｔ　Ｎｏｉｓｅ　ｉｓ　　　　Ｔｏｏ　Ｈｉｇｈ

　　　　　　　　　Ｒｅｔｒｙ　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

• There is too much ambient noise in the room and the measurements cannot be made accurately.

• Either turn off the power of the device that generated the noise during the measurements or move the device away.

•Try again at a time when it is quieter.

　　　　　　　　　ＥＲＲＯＲ！

　　　　Ｍｉｃｒｏｐｈｏｎｅ：Ｎｏｎｅ　　　　　　　　　　　ｏｒ　　　　　　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ：Ｎｏｎｅ

　　　　　　　　　Ｒｅｔｒｙ　　　　　　　　　Ｃａｎｃｅｌ

　　　　１−１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

• The measurement microphone is not connected, or all of speakers have not been detected.

• Connect the measurement microphone to the microphone connector.

• Check the speaker connection.

40

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　２．Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｍｉｃ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ　　５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ

1

Select “Room EQ Setup” at the Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Room EQ Setup

*AutoSet/RoomEQ

• Select the setting of an Equalizer that has been set with Auto Setup or Manual EQ.

2

q When the “All” is selected and press the ENTER

button, display the Select the EQ Curve screen. Select the Equalizer setting.

OFF : The Equalizer is not used. Audyssey : Adjusts the frequency response of

all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics.

Front : Adjusts the frequency response of

the surround speakers to match the characteristics of the front channel speakers.

Flat : Adjusts the frequency response of

all speakers to the flattest response. This mode is suitable for multi-channel music surround sound sources.

Manual : Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EQ setup.

For details of the “5-4. Manual EQ Setup”, see pages 82~84.

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Display the Room EQ Setup screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

SurMode: ALL

*Room EQ Setup

　１−２．Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　Ｒｅｌａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔｏ　　　Ｔｈｅ　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｍｏｄｅ

　　　　　ＡＬＬ　　：　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

3

Select All or Assign.

All : Sets the Equalizer for all surround modes. Assign : Sets the Equalizer individually for each surround mode.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

　１−２．Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ　Ｔｈｅ　ＥＱ　Ｃｕｒｖｅ

　　　Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　Ａｕｄｙｓｓｅｙ

EQ : Audyssey

*Room EQ Setup

OFF Audyssey

FlatManual

Front

NOTES:

• The Equalizer setting of “Audyssey”, “Flat” and “Front” can be selected after performing the Auto Setup.

• When the speaker set as “None” with the Auto Setup is changed to on manually, the equalizer of “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat” cannot be used.

• The Equalizer setting can be selected directly by ROOM EQ button on the Main unit or Remote control unit.

• When headphones are connected, the Room EQ cannot be used.

w If “Assign” is selected, select the desired equalizer setting using the ROOM EQ buttons on

the Main unit or Remote control unit. Equalizer settings for the individual surround modes can be stored in the memory.

1-2. Setting the Room EQ Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Whenever the ROOM EQ button on Main unit or Remote control unit is pressed, the display switches as shown below.

41

1-3. Setting the Direct Mode

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　２．Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｍｉｃ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ　　５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ

1

Select “Direct Mode Setup” at the Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Direct Mode

*AutoSet/RoomEQ

• Perform the ON/OFF setting of Room EQ when the surround mode is Direct or Pure Direct.

2

Display the Direct Mode Setup screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　１−３．Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　ＤＩＲＥＣＴ／ＰＵＲＥ　ＤＩＲＥＣＴ

　　　　Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　　　：

ON

OFF

3

Select ON or OFF.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

Enter the setting . The Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Room EQ: OFF

*Direct Mode

5

Enter the setting. The Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

42

4

Enter the setting. The Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

2 Specifications and Setup Procedure for Non-DENON Microphone Use for AVR-5805 Auto Setup and Room EQ

Function

Required Microphone for DENON Auto-Setup Room EQ : Product name Countryman B3.

Required Microphone Amplifier Specification for DENON Auto-Setup Room EQ.

• Gain : 29 dB

•Frequency Response : 10 ~ 30 kHz Full Flat (Ex : Rane MS1b)

Microphone Placement

• Set the microphone using microphone stand, or other method, at the prime listening position.

• Point the top of the microphone toward the ceiling.

• Adjust the height so that the top of microphone to matches the height of your ear when sitting.

3

Select the Mic input jack or V.AUX L jack.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

1-4. Setting the MIC Input Select

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　２．Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｍｉｃ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ　　５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ

1

Select “Mic Input Select” at the Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Mic In Select

*AutoSet/RoomEQ

• Sets whether the setup microphone is connected to the PIN JACK (V.AUX L channel) connector or the MINI JACK (SETUP MIC) connector.

2

Display the Mic Input Select screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　１−４．Ｍｉｃ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ

　　　　　　Ｍｉｃ　　：　　　　　Ｌ

V.Aux

Mic

*Mic In Select

43

Microphone Amplifier Gain Setting using Sound Level Meter and RMS Volt Meter

First you will need to adjust the “ microphone amplifier gain”. (1) Connect the all speakers and the video monitor (for the on-screen display) with the AVR-5805 (2) Connect the microphone with the microphone amplifier (3) Turn on the AVR-5805 and the “microphone amplifier” (4) Turn on the “Phantom Supply” on the microphone amplifier

(5) Set the Parameter “Test Tone” to “Manual” and “Test Tone Start” to “Yes” at “2-4. Channel Level”. (See pages 51, 52) (6) Once the test tone for Front Left (FL) speaker starts, check the Sound Pressure Level at the Listening Position with an SPL Meter. You

do not have to check any of the other channels. (7) Adjust the “Main Volume” so that the Sound Pressure Level measures 80 dB (C-weighted) (8) Once the “Main Volume” as been set, connect the output of microphone amplifier to the RMS Volt Meter (9) Adjust the “microphone amplifier’s gain” as the RMS Volt Meter becomes about 120 [mV RMS] (10) Once set, exit out of “System Setup” and turn off the AVR-5805 (11) Connect the output of the microphone amplifier to the AVR-5805’s front panel “V.AUX” Left channel audio input–located behind Trap Door (12) Change the setting to “V.AUX L” at “1-4. Mic Input Select”. (See pages 42, 43) (13) Start “Auto Setup”. (See pages 33~39)

AVR-5805

Speaker Microphone

Use the internal test tones for

mic amp calibration.

Pressure level with SPL meter at the

microphone point.

Adjust AVR volume SPL meter = 80 dB (C)

MIC AMP with mic

power supply ex.

mixer amp.

Measure the output level and

adjust the mic amp gain to 120

mVrms using a RMS volt meter.

120 mVrms

1-5. Check the Parameter

1

Select “Parameter Check” at the Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

• The results of the measured items can be checked.

• The EQ parameters that were set in Auto Setup can be checked.

• This item is automatically displayed, after the measurement result of the “Auto Setup / Room EQ” is decided.

2

Display the Parameter Check screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　１−５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　ＥＱ　Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｒｅｓｔｏｒｅ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

Ye s

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　２．Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｍｉｃ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ　　５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ

Parameter Check

*AutoSet/RoomEQ Sp Config.Check

*ParameterCheck

44

3

Select the items.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

Press the ENTER button and display the verification screen. For instructions on checking the results of each item, see page 38.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

5

EQ parameters can be checked here. Select “EQ Parameter Check” at the Parameter Check screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

6

Display the EQ Parameter Check screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　１−５．ＥＱ　Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　Ａｕｄｙｓｓｅｙ　　　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　Ｆｌａｔ

　　　　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　ＥＱ　Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　１−５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｒｅｓｔｏｒｅ

Ye s

EQ Check

*ParameterCheck Audyssey

*EQ Check

7

Select the Equalizer curve.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

ＥＱ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

−Ａｕｄｙｓｓｅｙ−　　　　　　　　Ｎｅｘｔ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｅｘｉｔ　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　Ｌ　　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　Ｒ

６３

１２５

２５０

５００

１ｋ２ｋ４ｋ

８ｋ

１６ｋ

−２０

−

６

０

＋

６

６３

１２５

２５０

５００

１ｋ２ｋ４ｋ

８ｋ

１６ｋ

−２０

−

６

０

＋

６

8

Display the parameter screen. The display is only an approximate picture of the response and that correction is happening at all frequencies.

9

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Select the speaker channel.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

FL/FR :Next

EQ Chk Audyssey

45

10

If the check ends, select “Exit” and press the ENTER button. The EQ Parameter Check screen reappears.

ＥＱ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

−Ａｕｄｙｓｓｅｙ−　　　　　　　　Ｎｅｘｔ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

ＳｕｒｒｏｕｎｄＢａｃｋ

　Ｌ　　　　

ＳｕｒｒｏｕｎｄＢａｃｋ

　Ｒ

６３

１２５

２５０

５００

１ｋ２ｋ４ｋ

８ｋ

１６ｋ

−２０

−

６

０

＋

６

６３

１２５

２５０

５００

１ｋ２ｋ４ｋ

８ｋ

１６ｋ

−２０

−

６

０

＋

６

Exit

EQ Chk Audyssey

11

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the EQ Parameter Check screen. The Parameter Check screen reappears.

　１−５．ＥＱ　Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　　　　　Ａｕｄｙｓｓｅｙ　　　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　Ｆｌａｔ

　　　　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

Exit

*EQ Check

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

12

The results of the “Auto Setup” procedure can be reset even if the settings have been changed after performing the “Auto Setup” procedure. Select “Restore Yes 0” then press the Cursor left button.

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　ＥＱ　Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　１−５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｒｅｓｔｏｒｅ

Ye s

Restore

*ParameterCheck

13

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the Parameter Check screen. The Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu reappears.

　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑ．Ｃｈｅｃｋ　　ＥＱ　Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　１−５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｒｅｓｔｏｒｅ

Ye s

Exit

*ParameterCheck

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

46

Setting the Speaker Setup

1

2

Select “Speaker Setup” at the System Setup Menu.

Display the Speaker Setup Menu screen.

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ　　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｎｕ

Speaker Setup

*System Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

2

• If the “Auto Setup” procedure has already been performed, there is no need to make this setting.

• Perform this setting if you wish to make the settings for your speaker systems manually.

2-1. Setting the type of speakers

• The composition of the signals output to each channels and the frequency response are adjusted automatically according to the combination of speakers actually being used.

1

CH SEL ENTER

Select “Speaker Config.” at the Speaker Setup Menu.

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

2

CH SEL ENTER

Display the Speaker Config. screen.

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Speaker Config.

*Speaker Setup

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Speaker Config.

*Speaker Setup

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the Auto Setup / Room EQ Menu screen. The System Setup Menu reappears.

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　２．Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｍｉｃ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ　　５．Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ　Ｃｈｅｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ

Exit

*AutoSet/RoomEQ

14

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

47

4

ENTER the setting. The Speaker Setup Menu reappears.

NOTE:

• Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the actual size of the speaker but according to the speaker’s capacity for playing low frequency (bass sound below the frequency set for the Crossover Frequency) signals. If you do not know, try comparing the sound at both settings (setting the volume to a level low enough so as not to damage the speakers) to determine the proper setting.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

• Parameters

Large.....................Select this when using speakers that can fully reproduce deep bass well below 80 Hz.

Small ....................Select this when using speakers that are not capable of handling deep bass well below 80 Hz. Most home theater main and

surround speakers perform best when configured as SMALL. Deep bass content in any channel with a SMALL speaker is routed to the subwoofer(s).

None.....................Select this when no speakers are installed.

Yes/No..................Select “Yes” when a subwoofer is installed, “No” when a subwoofer is not installed.

2 spkrs/1 spkr......Select the number of speakers to be used for the surround back channel.

A subwoofer with sufficient low frequency playback capability can better handle deep bass than most main and surround speakers, and the system’s overall performance will be greatly enhanced when SMALL is set for the main (front) and surround speakers. To take full advantage of the performance of the Home THX certified speaker systems, set the front, center and surround speaker size parameters to “Small” and the subwoofer to “Yes”. For the majority of speaker system configurations, using the SMALL setting for all main and surround speakers and connected subwoofer(s) set to ON will yield the best results. When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “Yes”, and when “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.

3

Set whether speakers are connected or not and, if so, their size parameters.

q Select the speaker.

w Select the parameter.

　　２−１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．Ａ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．Ｂ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．Ｂａｃｋ

Small None

Small

2spkrs 1spkr

None

Small None

　　２−１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　Ｓｐ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　Ｓｐ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ

Ye s

No

Large

Small

Small None

Center Sp.

Front Sp.

Subwoofer

Surround Sp. A

Surround back Sp.

Surround Sp. B

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Front : Small

*Speaker Config

48

2-2. Setting the low frequency distribution

• Set the subwoofer mode according to the speaker system being used.

• Select the play mode that provides bass reproduction with body.

4

Enter the setting. The Speaker Setup Menu reappears.

　　２−２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

Ｍｏｄｅ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　：

　　　　　　　　　　　ＴＨＸ

LFE

LFE+Main

1

Select “Subwoofer Setup” at the Speaker Setup Menu.

Select the setting.

NOTES:

— Assignment of low frequency signal range (2-1) —

• The only signals produced from the subwoofer channel are LFE signals (during playback of Dolby Digital or DTS signals) and the low frequency signal range of channels set to “Small” in the setup menu. The low frequency signal range of channels set to “Large” are produced from those channels.

— Subwoofer Setup (2-2) —

• The subwoofer mode setting is only valid when and “Yes” is set for the subwoofer in the “2-1. Speaker Configuration” settings (see pages 46, 47).

• When the input signal is analog or a PCM signal not including LFE signals, if “LFE-THX-” is selected, the low frequency component is not output from the subwoofer. To output the subwoofer channel, select “LFE+Main”.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Subwoofer Setup

*Speaker Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Mode: LFE-THX-

*SubwooferSetup

2

Display the Subwoofer Setup screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

LFE–THX– : For any channel(s) that are set to LARGE, low frequencies in that channel’s

corresponding source are directed to that loudspeaker only. Low frequencies that are directed to the subwoofer(s) are from the program source LFE channel, and from other channels where the speakers are set to SMALL. THX is recommended in this play mode so that bass interference is less likely to occur in the room.

LFE+Main : Low frequencies from speaker channels that have been set to LARGE are

reproduced from those speakers as well as from the subwoofer(s). Depending upon the characteristics of the LARGE main speakers, this mode may provide a more even low frequency response throughout the listening room.

49

2-3. Setting the Delay Time

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

1

Select “Delay Time” at the Speaker Setup Menu.

　２−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ

Ｓｅｔ　Ｔｈｅ　Ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ　ＴｏＥａｃｈ　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒｓ

Ｄｏ　Ｙｏｕ　Ｐｒｅｆｅｒ　Ｉｎ　Ｍｅｔｅｒｓ？　／　Ｉｎ　Ｆｅｅｔ？

　　Ｍｅｔｅｒｓ　　：　　Ｆｅｅｔ

　２−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ

Ｓｅｔ　Ｔｈｅ　Ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ　ＴｏＥａｃｈ　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒｓ

Ｄｏ　Ｙｏｕ　Ｐｒｅｆｅｒ　Ｉｎ　Ｍｅｔｅｒｓ？　／　Ｉｎ　Ｆｅｅｔ？

　　Ｍｅｔｅｒｓ　　：　　Ｆｅｅｔ

2

3

4

5

Display the Delay Time screen.

Select the desired unit, meters or feet.

Once “Meters” or “Feet” is selected in step 3, the Delay Time screen appears automatically.

Select the speaker to be set. The picture of the speaker selected blinks.

Example: When “Feet” is selected

　　２−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ａ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ａ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ｂ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ｂ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＬ　　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＲ　　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　２−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｐ　　　　　１

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

Ye s

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Delay Time

*Speaker Setup Meters : Feet

*Delay Time FL : 12.0ft

*Delay Time

• Input the distance between the listening position and the different speakers to set the delay time for the surround mode.

•Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music modes and THX Games mode. Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers. It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers (front left (FL) and front right (FR), surround left (SL) and surround right (SR), surround back left (SBL) and surround back right (SBR)) is less than 2 ft (60 cm).

Preparations:

Measure the distances between the listening position and the speakers (L1 to L6 on the diagram at the right).

L1: Distance between center speaker and listening position L2: Distance between front speakers and listening position L3: Distance between surround speakers and listening position L4: Distance between surround back speakers and listening position L5: Distance between subwoofer and listening position L6: Distance between surround back L and surround back R

L1

L2

L5

L3

L6

L4

Center FRFL

Subwoofer

SL

Listening position

SR

SBRSBL

50

6

Set the distance between the center speaker and listening position. The distance changes in units of 0.1 foot (0.03 meters) or 1 foot (0.3 meters) each time the button is pressed. Select the value closest to the measured distance.

If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the settings are automatically reset to the default values. When “Step” is selected, you can select the unit of “1ft (0.1m)” or “0.1ft (0.01m)”.

Please note that the difference of distance for every speaker should be 20 ft (6.0 m) or less. If you set an invalid distance, a CAUTION notice, such as screen right will appear. In this case, please relocate the blinking speaker(s) so that its distance is no larger than the value shown in highlighted line.

　　２−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ａ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ａ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ｂ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ｂ　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＬ　　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＲ　　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｐ　　　　　１

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　ＲＥＬＯＣＡＴＥ　ＢＬＩＮＫＩＮＧ　ＳＰ！

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　３０．０

ｆｔ

Ye s

Example: When the distance is set to 12 feet

for the center speaker

　　２−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｐ　　　　　１

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

Ye s

7

Enter the setting. The Speaker Setup Menu reappears. The AVR-5805 automatically sets the optimum surround delay time for the listening room.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Auto :

Adjust the level while listening to the test tones produced automatically from each speaker.

Manual :

Select the speaker from which you want to produce the test tone to adjust the level.

51

　２−４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　　　　：　　

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｌｅａｒ

Ye s

Auto

Manual

3

Select the mode. Select “Auto” or “Manual”.

Example: When the “Auto” mode is selected

4

5

Select “Test Tone Start”.

　２−４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　　　　：　　

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｌｅａｒ

Ye s

Auto

Manual

Select “Yes”.

Tone Start:Yes

*Channel Level

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

T.Tone: Auto

*Channel Level

2-4. Setting the Channel Level

• Use this setting to adjust so that the playback level between the different channels is equal.

•From the listening position, listen to the test tones produced from the speakers to adjust the level.

• The level can also be adjusted directly from the Remote control unit. (For details, see pages 134, 135.)

• The level of each channel should be adjusted to 75 dB (C-weighted, slow meter mode) on a sound level meter at the listening position. If a sound level meter is not available adjust the channels by ear so the sound levels are the same. Because adjusting the subwoofer level test tone by ear is difficult, use a well known music selection and adjust for natural balance.

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　２−４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　　　　：　　

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｌｅａｒ

Ye s

Auto

Manual

1

2

Select “Channel Level” at the Speaker Setup Menu.

Display the Channel Level screen.

Channel Level

*Speaker Setup T.Tone: Auto

*Channel Level

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

52

7

Enter the setting. The Channel Level screen reappears.

To cancel the settings, press the Cursor down button to select “Level Clear” and “Yes” on the Channel Level screen, then make the settings again.

　２−４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　　　　：　　

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｌｅａｒ

Ye s

Auto

Manual

NOTES:

• When adjusting the level of an active subwoofer system, you may also need to adjust the subwoofer’s own volume control.

• When you adjust the channel levels while in the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL mode, the channel level adjustments made will affect all surround modes. Consider this mode a Master Channel Level adjustment mode.

• After you have completed the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL adjustments, you can then activate the individual surround modes and adjust channel levels that will be remembered for each of those modes. Then, whenever you activate a particular surround sound mode, your preferred channel level adjustments for just that mode will be recalled. Check the instructions for adjusting channel levels within each surround mode. (See pages 134, 135)

•You can adjust the channel levels for each of the following surround modes: PURE DIRECT/DIRECT, STEREO, DOLBY/DTS SURROUND, HOME THX CINEMA, 9CH STEREO, WIDE SCREEN, SUPER STADIUM, ROCK ARENA, JAZZ CLUB, CLASSIC CONCERT, MONO MOVIE, VIDEO GAME and MATRIX.

• When using either surround speakers A or B, or when using surround speakers A and B at the same time, be sure to adjust the balance of playback levels between each channel for the various selections of “A or B” and “A and B”.

6

a. When “Auto” mode is selected:

Test tones are automatically emitted from each speaker. The test tones are emitted from each speaker in the following order, at 4-second intervals the first time and second time around, 2second intervals the third time around and on:

Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　ＦＬ　　　−１１．５

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ａ　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ｂ　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＲ　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＬ　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ｂ　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ａ　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

Auto

Use the Cursor left and right buttons to adjust all the speakers to the same volume. The volume can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in units of 0.5 dB.

b. When “Manual” mode is selected:

Example: When the volume is set to –11.5 dB

while the test tone is being produced from the Front Lch speaker

FL

SW

1spkr

2spkrs

C

FR

SRA

SBL

SLB

SLA

SB

SRB

SBR

When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” for “2-1. Speaker Configuration”, this is set to “SB”.

FL : -11.5dB

TestTone Auto

q Select the speaker. w Adjust all the speakers to the same

volume.

Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　ＦＬ　　　−１１．５

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ａ　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　Ｂ　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＲ　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＢＬ　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ｂ　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　Ａ　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

Manual

Example: “Manual” mode is selected.

FL : -11.5dB

TestTone Manual

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Flashing

53

2-5. Setting the Crossover Frequency

２−５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ

　　　　　　　　　Ｆｉｘｅｄ

　　　　　　　　　−ＴＨＸ−

1

Select the “Crossover Frequency” at the Speaker Setup Menu.

• Set the crossover frequency according to the low frequency response characteristics of the various (front, center, surround and surround back) speaker systems.

• If a connected main or surround loudspeaker has a specified –3 dB low frequency response rolloff, adjust the crossover frequency for that speaker to match the specified low frequency response limit – e.g. 80 Hz.

• When a speaker is set to SMALL, low frequencies in that channel that are below the crossover frequency are directed to the system’s subwoofer(s), or to speakers that are set to LARGE, for systems with no connected subwoofer(s).

Select the frequency.

Crossover Freq.

*Speaker Setup

4

Enter the setting. The Speaker Setup Menu reappears.

3

2

Display the Crossover Frequency screen.

Fixed -THX-

*Crossover Freq

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

FIXED –THX– :

Set to the THX rated 80 Hz crossover frequency.

VARIABLE 40, 60, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 150, 200, 250 Hz :

Set as desired according to your speakers’ bass playback ability.

Advanced :

The crossover frequency can be set individually for the different speakers. (See page 54)

If “LFE+Main” is set at “2-2. Subwoofer Setup”, “SW:LFE+Main” (see page 48) is displayed at the top right of the screen.

２−５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ

　　　　　　　　　Ｆｉｘｅｄ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ：

　　　　　　　　　−ＴＨＸ−

LFE+Main

NOTES:

• The crossover frequency is set to 80 Hz in the HOME THX CINEMA mode.

•We recommend using with the crossover frequency set to “FIXED –THX–”, but depending on the speaker, setting it to a different frequency may improve frequency response near the crossover frequency.

• The crossover frequency mode is valid only when subwoofer is set to ON, and when one or more speakers are set to SMALL, as described in section “2-1. Speaker Configuration” settings.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

54

2 Setting the crossover frequency individually for the different channels

1

Select “Advanced” at the Crossover Frequency screen.

　２−５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ

　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ａ　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｂ　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓ．Ｂａｃｋ　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　ＬＦＥ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　８０㎐

　　　　　　　　Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ

Small Small Small Small Small

Advanced

*Crossover Freq

2

Select the speaker to be set.

　２−５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ

　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ａ　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｂ　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓ．Ｂａｃｋ　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　ＬＦＥ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　８０㎐

　　　　　　　　Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ

Small Small Small Small Small

Front : 80Hz

*Crossover Freq

3

Select the frequency.

　２−５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ

　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　　　　：　１００㎐　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ａ　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｂ　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓ．Ｂａｃｋ　　　　　　　　：　　８０㎐　　ＬＦＥ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　８０㎐

　　　　　　　　Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ

Small Small Small Small Small

Front : 100Hz

*Crossover Freq

NOTES:

• If “LFE–THX–” is selected at “2-2. Subwoofer Setup”, the frequencies can only be selected for speakers set to “Small” at “2-1. Speaker Configuration”.

　２−５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ

　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　　　　：　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　　　　　　　　：　　４０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ａ　　　　：　　８０㎐　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｂ　　　　：　　Ｓ．Ｂａｃｋ　　　　　　　　：　１２０㎐　　ＬＦＥ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　８０㎐

　　　　　　　　Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ

Large Small Small

None

Small

• If “LFE+Main” is set at “2-2. Subwoofer Setup”, the frequencies can be selected regardless of the speaker size setting.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

55

4

Enter the setting. The Speaker Setup Menu reappears.

For the “WIDE SCREEN” and “9CH STEREO” DSP simulation modes, the surround speakers can be set separately. See pages 60, 61 for setting the surround speaker when the “Analog” mode is selected at “3-2. EXT.IN Setup”.

2-6. Selecting the Surround Speakers for the different surround modes

• This Menu is displayed when both surround speakers A and B are used.

• At this screen preset the surround speakers to be used in each surround modes.

２−６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　ＴＨＸ／ＤＯＬＢＹ／ＤＴＳ

　　ＣＩＮＥＭＡ　　　　　　　　　Ａ　Ｂ　Ａ＋Ｂ

　ＭＵＬＴＩ　ＣＨ　ＭＯＤＥ　　　Ａ　Ｂ　Ａ＋Ｂ

　　ＭＵＳＩＣ　　　　　　　　　　Ａ　Ｂ　Ａ＋Ｂ　　ＧＡＭＥ　　　　　　　　　　　Ａ　Ｂ　Ａ＋Ｂ　ＷＩＤＥ　ＳＣＲＥＥＮ　　　　　Ａ　Ｂ　Ａ＋Ｂ　９ＣＨ　ＳＴＥＲＥＯ　　　　　　Ａ　Ｂ　Ａ＋Ｂ　ＤＳＰ　ＳＩＭＵＬＡＴＩＯＮ　　Ａ　Ｂ　Ａ＋Ｂ

3

q To select the surround mode

w To select the surround speaker

A:When surround speakers A is used. B:When surround speakers B is used. A+B : When both surround speakers A and B are used.

CINEMA : A

*Surr Sp Setup

1

Select “Surround Sp Setup” at the Speaker Setup Menu.

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Surr Sp Setup

*Speaker Setup

2

Display the Surround Sp Setup screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

About

Speaker type setting when using both surround speakers A and B

• If “Small” is set for either surround speakers A or B, the output is the same as when “Small” is set for both A and B.

56

5

Press the ENTER button to return to the THX Audio Setup screen.

2-7. Setting the THX Audio Setup

[1] Settings for using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer

• Make these settings when “Yes” is selected for the subwoofer in the “2-1. Speaker Configuration” settings. There is not displayed when “No” selected. (pages 46, 47)

　　２−７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｂｏｕｎｄａｒｙ　Ｇａｉｎ　　Ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ

　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｂａｃｋ　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

4

When using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer or subwoofer that frequency response extends to 20 Hz, select “Yes”. Otherwise select “No”.

• When “Yes” is selected “Boundary Gain Compensation” can be selected and the compensation set to “OFF”.

• If the bass sound seems too strong Set “Boundary Gain Compensation” to “ON”. This activates a filter that gently reduces very deep bass below 55 Hz to provide the flattest overall deep bass response. Select ON or OFF according to how strong you prefer the deep bass response to be.

Boundary Gain

*THX AudioSetup

1

Select “THX Audio Setup” at the Speaker Setup Menu.

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

THX Audio Setup

*Speaker Setup

2

Display the THX Audio Setup screen.

3

Select “Boundary Gain Compensation”, then press the ENTER button.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

　　２−７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｄｏ　Ｙｏｕ　Ｈａｖｅ　　Ａ　ＴＨＸ　Ｕｌｔｒａ２　Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　　（Ｏｒ　Ｓｕｂ　Ｔｈａｔ　　　Ｅｘｔｅｎｄｓ　Ｔｏ　２０Ｈｚ）？　　　　　　　　　：

Ye s No

　　２−７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｄｏ　Ｙｏｕ　Ｈａｖｅ　　Ａ　ＴＨＸ　Ｕｌｔｒａ２　Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　　（Ｏｒ　Ｓｕｂ　Ｔｈａｔ　　　Ｅｘｔｅｎｄｓ　Ｔｏ　２０Ｈｚ）？　　　　　　　　　：

　　Ｂｏｕｎｄａｒｙ　Ｇａｉｎ　　Ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ　　　　　　　　　：

Ye s No

ON

OFF

THX U2 SW: Yes

Boundary Gain

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

THX U2 SW: No

Boundary Gain

57

[2] Surround Back Speaker Position Settings

• When two surround back speakers have been set in “2-1. Speaker Configuration” (pages 46, 47), set the distance of the speakers. There is not displayed when “1spkr” selected.

• This setting is necessary to achieve the optimum effect in the THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music modes and THX Games mode. It is recommended that SBL/SBR speakers are placed together as close as possible.

　　２−７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　Ｓｅｔ　Ｔｈｅ　ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ　　　　Ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ　ＳＢＬ／ＳＢＲ

　　　　　　　　０

ｆｔ

　ｔｏ　１

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　（０ｍ　ｔｏ　０．３ｍ）

0ft to 1ft

SB Sp Position

1

Select “Surround Back Speaker Position” at the THX Audio Setup screen and press the ENTER button.

　　２−７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｂｏｕｎｄａｒｙ　Ｇａｉｎ　　Ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ

　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｂａｃｋ　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

SB Sp Position

*THX AudioSetup

2

Select the settings according to the distances of the two surround back speakers. (page 49)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

　　２−７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｂｏｕｎｄａｒｙ　Ｇａｉｎ　　Ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ

　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｂａｃｋ　　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

Exit

*THX AudioSetup

3

Press the ENTER button to return to the THX Audio Setup screen.

4

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button to return to the Speaker Setup Menu screen.

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｓｐ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．ＴＨＸ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Exit

*Speaker Setup

5

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the Speaker Setup Menu screen. The System Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

58

Setting the Audio Input Setup

1

2

Select “Audio Input Setup” at the System Setup Menu.

Display the Audio Input Setup Menu screen.

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ　　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｎｕ

Audio In Setup

*System Setup

　　１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ　　５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．　　７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

3

• Make the audio-related settings.

3-1. Setting the Digital In Assignment

• This setting assigns the digital input jacks of the AVR-5805 for the different input sources.

1

2

3

　　１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ　　５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．　　７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　３−１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ２　　　　　：　ＯＰＴ６　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ３　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ４　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ５　　　　：　ＯＰＴ１　　　　：　ＯＰＴ２　　　　：　ＯＰＴ３　　　　：　ＯＰＴ４　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　：　ＣＯＡＸ１　　　　　：　ＯＰＴ５

Ye s

CD Tape DVD V.Aux VDP

TV DBS

VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4

Select “Digital In Assign” at the Audio Input Setup Menu.

Display the Digital In Assign screen.

Select the digital input jack to be assigned to the input source.

q Select the input source.

Digital In

*Audio In Setup CD : COAX1

*Digital In

w Select the digital input jack.

Select from among COAX 1 to 6, OPT 1 to 6. Select “OFF” for input sources for which no digital input jacks are used. It is not possible to select the same digital input jack for different input sources. If the same digital input jack is selected, the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to “OFF”. The HDMI input terminal is displayed when it is assigned to the input source at “4-5. HDMI/DVI In Assign”. (See pages 75, 76)

If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the settings are automatically reset to the default values.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Digital In

*Audio In Setup

59

4

Enter the setting. The Audio Input Setup Menu reappears.

NOTES:

• The OPTICAL 3, 4 and 5 jacks on the AVR-5805’s rear panel are equipped with an optical digital output jack for recording digital audio signals to a CD recorder, MD recorder, or other digital audio recording deck. Use this for digital recording between a digital audio source (stereo - 2 channel) and a digital audio recorder.

• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 3 OUT jack on the AVR-5805’s rear panel to any jack other than the OPTICAL 3 IN jack.

• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 4 OUT jack on the AVR-5805’s rear panel to any jack other than the OPTICAL 4 IN jack.

• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 5 OUT jack on the AVR-5805’s rear panel to any jack other than the OPTICAL 5 IN jack.

• “PHONO” and “TUNER” cannot be selected on the Digital In Assignment screen.

Refer to “DENON LINK connections”. (See page 18)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

60

3-2. Setting the EXT. IN Setup

• Set the method of playback of the analog input signal connected to the EXT.IN-1 (10 CH) and EXT.IN-2 (6 CH) terminal.

1

Select “EXT.IN Setup” at the Audio Input Setup Menu.

　　１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ　　５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．　　７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

2

Display the EXT.IN Setup screen.

　３−２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ−１

　　　ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ−２

　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３−２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ−１　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　Ｍｏｄｅ　　　　　　　　　　ＤＳＰ　　　Ｓｕｒｒ．Ｂ　　　　　ＮＯＴ　ＵＳＥＤ　　　Ｓ．Ｂａｃｋ　　　　　ＮＯＴ　ＵＳＥＤ　　　ＳＷ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　　　　＋１５ｄＢ　　　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　ＡＴＴ．　　　　ＯＦＦ

3

q Select the input terminal. w Switch to the setting screen.

4

Select the item to be set (use the Cursor button to the up and down) then select the parameter (use the Cursor left and right buttons).

EXT.IN Setup

*Audio In Setup EXT.IN-1

*EXT.IN Setup

Mode : DSP

*EXT.IN-1 Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

61

MODE :

DSP : The analog input signal is converted into a digital signal and undergoes DSP processing.

System Setup settings (speaker configuration, channel delay, etc.) are reflected in the same way as for other input signals. The surround playback mode button functions.

ANALOG : The analog input signal is played without DSP processing.

SW and center channel: Down-mixing is conducted by the analog circuit. Surround and surround back channels: Not output if “No” is selected at the speaker configuration. Channel delay: Not reflected.

S. Back :

Set when MODE is set to “DSP”. Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.

NOT USED : Select when neither SBL or SBR is connected. SB (SBL) : Select when only one surround back channel (SBL) is connected. SBL/SBR : Select when two surround back channels (SBL and SBR) are connected.

Surr. B :

Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.

NOT USED : Select when Surround B is not connected.

The Surround A input signal is output to the Surround B output connector.

USED : Select when Surround B is connected. The playback in the MULTI CH DIRECT and MULTI CH IN is only possible when

MODE is set to “DSP”.

Surr. Sp :

Set when MODE is set to “ANALOG”. Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.

Surr. A : Select when using surround speakers A. Surr. B : Select when using surround speakers B. Surr. A+B : Select when using both surround speakers A and B.

SW Level :

Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions. Set the level of playback of the analog input signal connected to the Ext.In Subwoofer. +15dB (default) recommended. (0, +5, +10 and +15 can be selected.)

INPUT ATT. :

Set when MODE is set to “DSP”. If the OVER LOAD indicator is displayed on the fluorescent tube, select “–6 dB”.

• The items to be set differ as described below according to the selected input jack and the “Mode” selection.

Mode

S. Back

Surr. B

Surr. Sp

SW Level

Input ATT.

EXT. IN-2 (6 CH)EXT. IN-1 (10 CH)

DSP ANALOG

NOT USED, SBL/SBR, SB (SBL) –

NOT USED / USED NOT USED / USED

– Surr.A / Surr.B / Surr.A+B

0, +5, +10, +15 dB 0, +5, +10, +15 dB

OFF, –6 dB –

DSP ANALOG

––

– Surr. A / Surr. B / Surr. A+B

0, +5, +10, +15 dB 0, +5, +10, +15 dB

OFF, –6 dB –

5

Enter the setting. The EXT.IN Setup screen reappears.

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button to return to the Audio Input setup Menu screen.

　３−２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ−１

　　　ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ−２

　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

6

Exit

*EXT.IN Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

62

3-3. Setting the Input Function Level

• Correct the playback level of the different input sources.

• Adjust the playback levels of the devices connected to the different input sources to the same level to eliminate the need for adjusting the main volume each time the input source is switched.

1

2

　　１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ　　５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．　　７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　３−３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．

　　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　　：　　　０ｄＢ　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

Ye s

Tuner DBS

VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.Aux

Phono

CD Tape DVD VDP

TV

Select “Input Function Lev.” at the Audio Input Setup Menu.

Display the Input Function Lev. screen.

Input Func.Lev.

*Audio In Setup TUNER : 0dB

*Input Func.Lev

q Select the input source. w Adjust the level.

The level can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in units of 1 dB.

3

If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the settings are automatically reset to the default values.

4

Enter the setting. The Audio Input Setup Menu reappears.

After completing this setting, check that the playback levels for the different sources are the same.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

63

3-4. Setting the Function Rename

• The names of the input sources displayed on the front display and on the on-screen display can be changed. The names or brands of the devices connected to the input sources can be input.

1

2

　　１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ　　５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．　　７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　３−４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　：　ＴＵＮＥＲ　　　　　　　　　：　ＰＨＯＮＯ　　　　　　　　　：　ＣＤ　　　　　　　　　：　ＣＤＲ／ＴＡＰＥ　　　　　　　　　：　ＤＶＤ　　　　　　　　　：　ＶＤＰ　　　　　　　　　：　ＴＶ

Tuner

Phono

CD

Tape

DVD VDP

TV

Select “Function Rename” at the Audio Input Setup Menu.

Display the Function Rename screen.

Function Rename

*Audio In Setup TUNER TUNER

*FunctionRename

Select the input source whose name you want to change.

3

　　３−４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　：　ＴＵＮＥＲ　　　　　　　　　：　ＰＨＯＮＯ　　　　　　　　　：　ＣＤ　　　　　　　　　：　ＣＤＲ／ＴＡＰＥ　　　　　　　　　：　ＤＶＤ　　　　　　　　　：　ＶＤＰ　　　　　　　　　：　ＴＶ

Tuner

Phono

CD

Tape

DVD VDP

TV

　　３−４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　：　ＤＢＳ　　　　　　　　　：　ＶＣＲ−１　　　　　　　　　：　ＶＣＲ−２　　　　　　　　　：　ＶＣＲ−３　　　　　　　　　：　ＶＣＲ−４　　　　　　　　　：　Ｖ．ＡＵＸ

DBS

VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.Aux

4

Press the Cursor left and right buttons. The screen switches to the character input screen.

　　３−４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　：　ＴＵＮＥＲ

　　　　　　　　　　　Ｙｅｓ

Tuner

Default

TUNER

Rename TUNER

Example: When “TUNER” is selected and

the Cursor left and right buttons are pressed

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

5

q Move the cursor to choose the position at which you want to input the character using the

Cursor left and right buttons.

w Select the character to be input using the Cursor up and down buttons.

Up to 8 characters can be input.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

AB C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! “ # % & ‘ ( ) *+ , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

64

Repeat step 5 to input the input source name.

6

(Main unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

If you wish to set the input source back to as it was initially, press the Cursor down button with the input source highlighted. If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the setting are automatically reset to the default name.

　　３−４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　：　ＴＵ−１５００

　　　　　　　　　　　Ｙｅｓ

Tuner

Default

Rename Clear

Rename TUNER

　　３−４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　：　ＴＵ−１５００

　　　　　　　　　　　Ｙｅｓ

Tuner

Default

Default : Yes

Rename TUNER

7

Once all the characters have been input, press the ENTER button. The Function Rename screen reappears.

Use the same procedure to change other input source names as well.

When the input source is selected, the display is as shown below.

　　　　　ＴＵ−１５００　　　　　ＳＴＥＲＥＯ

Mode

Input

ANALOG

STEREO

TU-1500

Example: When the name has been changed to “TU-1500”

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

8

Enter the setting. The Audio Input Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

65

3-5. Setting the IEEE1394 Assign

• Assign the device connected by IEEE1394 cable to an input source. The power of the device to be assigned must be turned on ahead of time.

1

2

　　１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ　　５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．　　７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　３−５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　Ｉ１　　ＤＶＤ−３９１０　　：　　−−− 　　Ｉ２　　ＤＶＤ−５９００　　：　　−−−

Select “IEEE1394 Assign” at the Audio Input Setup Menu.

Display the IEEE1394 Assign screen.

IEEE1394 Assign

*Audio In Setup DVD-3910 ---

*IEEE1394Assign

q Select the device to be assigned to the

input source.

w Select the input source.

3

4

Enter the setting. The Audio Input Setup Menu reappears.

If you do not wish to assign the device connected by IEEE1394 cable to an input source, the IEEE1394 input can be selected by turning the FUNCTION knob. In this case, the connection information is cleared when the power of the connected device or the AVR-5805 is turned off, so the selection procedure must be performed again.

　　３−５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　Ｉ１　　ＤＶＤ−３９１０　　：　　Ｉ２　　ＤＶＤ−５９００　　：　　−−−

DVD

DVD-3910: DVD

*IEEE1394Assign

NOTES:

• By default, if no device has been connected using an IEEE1394 cable in the past, “No Connection” is displayed.

• “Connection Change” is displayed if there is a change in the IEEE1394 connection status while this screen is displayed.

• If the model name cannot be acquired from the connected IEEE1394 device, “UNKNOWN” is displayed.

• If an IEEE1394 device other than one for IEEE1394 audio playback is connected, “Not Play” is displayed and the input source cannot be assigned.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

66

3-6. Setting the IEEE1394 Auto Function

• Set whether or not to automatically play the IEEE1394 device when it is selected with the FUNCTION knob.

1

2

　　１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ　　５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．　　７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　３−６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．

　　　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ

OFF

Select “IEEE1394 Auto Func.” at the Audio Input Setup Menu.

Display the IEEE1394 Auto Function screen.

IEEE1394 Auto

*Audio In Setup Auto Func: OFF

*IEEE1394 Auto

Select “ON” or “OFF”.

ON : Select this to automatically play the device. OFF : Select this if you do not want to automatically play the device.

3

NOTE:

• In some cases settings may be required on your player. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.

4

Enter the setting. The Audio Input Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

67

4

Press the Cursor left button to select “Yes”. “Search” flashes on the screen and searching begins. “Completed” appears once searching is completed. The display automatically switches to the Tuner Presets screen.

[1] Auto Preset Memory

Use this to automatically search for FM broadcasts and store up to 56 stations at preset channels A1 to 8, B1 to 8, C1 to 8, D1 to 8, E1 to 8, F1 to 8 and G1 to 8.

　　　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ

　　　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｓｋｉｐ

　　　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｎａｍｅ

　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３−７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ

Auto Preset

*Tuner Presets

1

Select “Tuner Presets” at the Audio Input Setup Menu.

　　１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ　　５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．　　７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Tuner Presets

*Audio In Setup

2

Display the Tuner Presets screen.

3

Select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press the ENTER button. Switch to the Auto Preset Memory screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

3-7. Tuner Presets

　３−７．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ

　　　　　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｔｕｎｉｎｇ　＆　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｓｔａｔｉｏｎ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ　Ｓｔｏｒｉｎｇ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ

　　　Ｓｔａｒｔ

Ye s

Start :Yes

*Auto Preset

NOTE:

• If an FM station cannot be preset automatically due to poor reception, use the “Manual tuning” operation to tune in the station, then preset it using the manual “Preset memory” operation.

68

4

When the Cursor down button is pressed at the very bottom of the screen, the screen for the next preset memory block appears.

It is also possible to select the desired preset memory block by selecting “Block” then pressing the Cursor left and right buttons.

[2] Preset Skip

When selecting preset channels using the Preset up and down buttons, it is possible to skip specific preset channels.

　３−７．Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｓｋｉｐ　　Ｂｌｏｃｋ　　　Ａ

　　Ａ２

ＦＭ

　８９．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ３

ＦＭ

　９８．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ４

ＦＭ

１０７．９０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ５

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ６

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ７

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ８

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ１ＦＭ　８７．５０Ｍ㎐：

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON

A1 87.50M ON

*Preset Skip

1

Select “Preset Skip” at the Tuner Presets screen.

　　　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ

　　　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｓｋｉｐ

　　　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｎａｍｅ

　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３−７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ

Preset Skip

*Tuner Presets

2

Switch to the Preset Skip screen.

3

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

q Select the preset channel you want to

skip.

w Select “ON” or “OFF”.

　３−７．Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｓｋｉｐ　　Ｂｌｏｃｋ　　　Ｂ

　　Ｂ２

ＡＭ

　　　６００ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ３

ＡＭ

　　１０００ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ４

ＡＭ

　　１４００ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ５

ＡＭ

　　１５００ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ６

ＡＭ

　　１７１０ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ７

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ｂ８

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ｂ１

ＡＭ

　　　５２０ｋ㎐：

ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON

A1 87.5M OFF

*Preset Skip

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　３−７．Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｓｋｉｐ　　Ｂｌｏｃｋ　　　Ａ

　　Ａ２

ＦＭ

　８９．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ３

ＦＭ

　９８．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ４

ＦＭ

１０７．９０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ５

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ６

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ７

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ８

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ１ＦＭ　８７．５０Ｍ㎐：

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

OFF

5

Repeat steps 3 and 4.

6

Press the ENTER button to return to the Tuner Presets screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

69

4

Press the Cursor left and right buttons. The screen switches to the character input screen.

[3] Preset Name

It is possible to input station names , etc., for preset channels. These names are displayed on the front display and on the on-screen display.

　３−７．Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｎａｍｅ　　Ｂｌｏｃｋ　　　Ａ

　　Ａ２

ＦＭ

　８９．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ３

ＦＭ

　９８．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ４

ＦＭ

１０７．９０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ５

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ６

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ７

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ８

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ａ１ＦＭ　８７．５０Ｍ㎐：

A1FM 87.50MHz

*Preset Name

1

Select “Preset Name” at the Tuner Presets screen.

　　　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ

　　　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｓｋｉｐ

　　　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｎａｍｅ

　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３−７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ

Preset Name

*Tuner Presets

2

Switch to the Preset Name screen.

3

Select the preset channel whose name you want to change.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　３−７．Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｎａｍｅ

　　Ａ１

ＦＭ

　８７．５０Ｍ㎐：

　　　　　　　　Ｙｅｓ

Default

¡

Name A1

5

q Move the cursor to choose the position at which you want to

input the character using the Cursor left and right buttons.

w Select the character to be input using the Cursor up and down

buttons. Up to 8 characters can be input.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Example: When “A1” is selected and the

Cursor left and right buttons are pressed

AB C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! “ # % & ‘ ( ) *+ , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

70

Repeat step 5 to input the preset channel name.

6

(Main unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

If you wish to set the preset channel name back to as it was initially, press the Cursor down button with the preset channel name highlighted. If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the setting are automatically reset to the default name.

7

Once all the characters have been input, press the ENTER button. The Preset Name screen reappears.

Use the same procedure to change other input source names as well.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

8

When the Cursor down button is pressed at the very bottom of the screen, the screen for the next preset memory block appears.

It is also possible to select the desired preset memory block by selecting “Block” then pressing the Cursor left and right buttons.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　３−７．Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｎａｍｅ　　Ｂｌｏｃｋ　　　Ｂ

　　Ｂ２

ＡＭ

　　　６００ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ３

ＡＭ

　　１０００ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ４

ＡＭ

　　１４００ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ５

ＡＭ

　　１５００ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ６

ＡＭ

　　１７１０ｋ㎐：

　　Ｂ７

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ｂ８

ＦＭ

　９０．１０Ｍ㎐：

　　Ｂ１

ＡＭ

　　　５２０ｋ㎐：

9

Enter the setting. The Audio Input Setup Menu reappears.

10

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the Audio Input Setup Menu screen. The System Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

　　１．Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．ＥＸＴ．ＩＮ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｒｅｎａｍｅ　　５．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．ＩＥＥＥ１３９４　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｆｕｎｃ．　　７．Ｔｕｎｅｒ　Ｐｒｅｓｅｔｓ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Exit

*Audio In Setup

　　３−７．Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｎａｍｅ

　　Ａ１

ＦＭ

　８７．５０Ｍ㎐：　ＷＭＪＸ−ＦＭ

　　　　　　　　Ｙｅｓ

Default

Rename Clear

Name A1

　　３−７．Ｐｒｅｓｅｔ　Ｎａｍｅ

　　Ａ１

ＦＭ

　８７．５０Ｍ㎐：　ＷＭＪＸ−ＦＭ

　　　　　　　　Ｙｅｓ

Default

Default : Yes

Name A1

71

Setting the Video Setup

1

2

Select “Video Setup” at the System Setup Menu.

Display the Video Setup Menu screen.

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ　　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｎｕ

Video Setup

*System Setup

　　１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ　　４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ　　５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ　　７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

4

• Make the video-related settings.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4-1. Setting the Component In Assign

• This setting assigns the component video input terminal of the AVR-5805 for the different input sources.

1

　　１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ　　４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ　　５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ　　７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Select “Component In Assign” at the Video Setup Menu.

2

Display the Component In Assign screen.

４−１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　　　：　２−ＲＣＡ　　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　：　３−ＲＣＡ　　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　：　４−ＲＣＡ　　　　：　５−ＲＣＡ　　　　：　６−ＢＮＣ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　：　１−ＲＣＡ　　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ

Ye s

DVD

VCR-3 VCR-4 V.Aux

VDP

TV

DBS VCR-1 VCR-2

DVD : 1RCA

*Component In Component In

*Video Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

Select the component (Y, P

B/CB and PR/CR) video input terminal to be assigned to the input source.

Select from among 1-RCA to 5-RCA and 6-BNC. Select “NONE” for input sources for which the component (Y, P

B/CB and PR/CR) video input is not to be used.

It is not possible to select the same component video input jack for different sources. If the same component video input jack is selected, the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to “NONE”.

If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the settings are reset to the default values.

q Select the input source. w Select the component video input terminal.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Component In

*Video Setup

72

4

Enter the setting. The Video Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

1

Select “Video Convert Mode” at the Video Setup Menu.

　　１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ　　４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ　　５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ　　７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

2

Display the Video Convert Mode screen.

　４−２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ

DVD

V.Aux

VDP

TV

DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4

4-2. Setting the Video Convert Mode

Video Mode

*Video Setup DVD : Auto

*Video Mode

3

q Select the input source for which you want to set the Video

Convert Mode.

w Select the mode as below.

AUTO : When there are multiple input signals, the input signals are detected and the input signal to be output from the video

monitor output terminal is selected automatically in the following order: component video, S-Video, composite video.

Component : The signal connected to the component video terminal is always played.

The component input signal is down–converted and output from the composite and component monitor output terminal. No image is output from the monitor output terminal when there is no input signal to the component input terminal.

S-Video : The signal connected to the S-Video terminal is always played.

The S-Video input signal is converted and output from the composite and component monitor output terminal.

Video : The signal connected to the composite video terminal is always played.

The composite video input signal is up-converted and output from the S-Video and component monitor output terminals.

OFF : The convert function does not operate.

The video signal input from the video input jack is only output to the video monitor out jack. The S-Video signal input from the S-Video input jack is only output to the S-Video monitor out jack. The component input signal input from the component input jacks is only output to the component monitor output terminals.

AUTO

Component

S-video Video OFF

The details in each mode are as follows.

• Select the input signal to be output to the composite S-Video and component monitor output terminals using the video conversion function.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

NOTE:

• Down-converting from the component video signal to the S-Video and composite video signal is possible only when the resolution of a component video signal is 480i / 576i.

73

4-3. Setting the Video Scaler

NOTES:

• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to OFF.

• When the video conversion function has been used, information such as that of text broadcasts which has been added to the video signal might not be output. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to OFF.

1

Select “Video Scaler” at the Video Setup Menu.

　　１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ　　４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ　　５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ　　７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

2

Display the Video Scaler screen.

　　Ａｓｐｅｃｔ　　　　　　　ＦＵＬＬ

　　Ｒｅｓｏｌｕｔｉｏｎ　　４８０ｉ／５７６ｉ

　　４−３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ

Video Scaler

*Video Setup Aspect: FULL

*Video Scaler

3

q Select the Aspect. w Please select the setting of the output video aspect ratio.

FULL : The video is output while maintaining the aspect ratio of the input video.

This mode is suited for playing back 16:9 video.

NORMAL : A black band is added to the left and right of the input video and the video is output.

This mode is suited for playing back 4:3 video.

• The setting of the component video output resolution and aspect ratio conversion are performed.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

q Select the Resolution. w Please select the resolution setting of the output video.

480i / 576i : The input video is output at a resolution of 480i/576i. 480p / 576p : The input video is converted to a resolution of 480p/576p and output. 1080i : The input video is converted to a resolution of 1080i and output. 720p : The input video is converted to a resolution of 720p and output.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

Enter the setting. The Video Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

74

4-4. Setting the 3D Y/C Separation

• This setting sets the action detection sensitivity of the 3-dimensional Y/C separation at the time of the video signal up-conversion to S-Video.

1

　　１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ　　４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ　　５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ　　７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Select “3D Y/C Separation” at the Video Setup Menu.

2

Display the 3D Y/C Separation screen.

　　Ｍｏｔｉｏｎ　Ｄｅｔｅｃｔｉｏｎ：　ＭＩＤ

　４−４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ

MotionDet: MID

*3D Y/C Sep. 3D Y/C Sep.

*Video Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

Select the setting.

HIGH : This sets the action detection sensitivity to a high level. It suits video with fast action. MID : This is the standard setting. Usually, this setting is recommended. LOW : This sets the action detection sensitivity to a low level. It suits video with little action,

such as still images, etc.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

NOTES:

• When the component video input signal is a resolution other than 480i/576i, this setting is invalid and the input video is output without change.

• The setting of the aspect ratio is valid when the resolution has been set to 1080i or 720p. When the video is output at another resolution, please set the aspect ratio at the TV side.

• When the composite input signal or S-video input signal is in PAL format or when the component input signal is in 576i format, the video signal is output with a resolution of 576p, even if the resolution is set at 1080i or 720p.

4

Enter the setting. The Video Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

5

Enter the setting. The Video Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

75

4-5. Setting the HDMI / DVI In Assign

1

Select “HDMI / DVI In Assign” at the Video Setup Menu.

　　１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ　　４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ　　５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ　　７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

2

Display the HDMI / DVI In Assign.

４−５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ

　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ

DVD VDP

TV

DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4 V.Aux

HDMI/DVI In

*Video Setup DVD : NONE

*HDMI/DVI In

3

q Select the input source. w Select the input terminal.

Select from among HDMI1 to 3 and DVI-D. If the same HDMI or DVI input terminal is selected, the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to “NONE”. Select “NONE” for input sources for which both the HDMI and DVI input terminals are not used.

• This setting assigns the HDMI input terminals and DVI input terminal for different input sources.

• Select which input signal, HDMI or DVI, is to be output from which monitor out jack, HDMI or DVI.

• Set the method for playing the audio signals included in the HDMI input signal.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Select the HDMI input terminal or DVI input terminal to be assigned to the input source.

Select the “HDMI” or “DVI” monitor output terminal to be used.

This setting can be switched directly using the MONITOR SELECT button on either the Main unit or the Remote control unit.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

4

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Monitor : HDMI

*HDMI/DVI In

76

7

Enter the setting. The Video Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Select the method for playing the audio signals included in the HDMI input signal. Select “TV” or “AMP”.

AMP : The audio signals are played according

to the AVR-5805’s speaker systems.

TV : The audio signals are played according

to the number of playable channels on the monitor TV connected to the AVR5805’s HDMI monitor output terminal.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

5

４−５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　　　：　ＨＤＭＩ２　　　　：　ＨＤＭＩ３　　ＨＤＭＩ　　　　：　ＤＶＩ−Ｄ　　　　　　：　ＡＭＰ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　Ｎｏ　Ｓｉｇｎａｌ　　　　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　１：　ＥＸＴ−１　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　２：　ＥＸＴ−２　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　３：　ＡＮＡＬＯＧ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ

　　　　：　ＨＤＭＩ１　　　　　　：　ＨＤＭＩ

DVD VDP

TV

DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4

Monitor

Audio

V.Aux

Audio : AMP

*HDMI/DVI In

Select the input for the playback of signals when the audio signal of HDMI can not be reproduced. When the audio signal of HDMI has become unlocked, the unit automatically changes over to the set connector (ANALOG or EXT. IN). 1~3 correspond to each HDMI 1~3 input terminal. Select input signal (ANALOG or EXT. IN).

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

6

４−５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ

　　　　：　ＨＤＭＩ２　　　　：　ＨＤＭＩ３　　ＨＤＭＩ　　　　：　ＤＶＩ−Ｄ　　　　　　：　ＡＭＰ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　Ｎｏ　Ｓｉｇｎａｌ　　　　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　１：　ＡＮＡＬＯＧ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　２：　ＥＸＴ−２　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ　　　　３：　ＡＮＡＬＯＧ　　　　：　ＮＯＮＥ

　　　　：　ＨＤＭＩ１　　　　　　：　ＨＤＭＩ

DVD

VDP

TV

DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4

Monitor

Audio

V.Aux

1: ANALOG

*HDMI/DVI In

4-6. Setting the Audio Delay

• When watching a DVD or other video source, the picture on the monitor may seem delayed with respect to the sound. In this case, adjust the audio delay to delay the sound and synchronize it with the picture.

• The audio delay setting is stored separately for each input source.

1

　　１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ　　４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ　　５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ　　７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Select “Audio Delay” at the Video Setup Menu.

2

Display the Audio Delay screen.

　　　　　　　：　　　　　　　０ｍｓ

　　４−６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ

DVD

Input!Source

0ms

*Audio Delay Audio Delay

*Video Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

NOTE:

• If a monitor is connected with an HDMI cable but the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor from the AVR-5805 (DVI mode). Use the STATUS button to check which mode is set for outputting HDMI signals from the AVR-5805 (HDMI and DVI modes).

77

3

Set the delay time. (0 ms ~ 100 ms)

With a movie source, for example, adjust so that the movement of the actors’ lips is synchronized with the sound.

When “OFF” mode is selected at “4-2. Video Convert Mode”, the delay time can be set within the range of 0 to 200 ms.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

Enter the setting. The Video Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

NOTES:

• The audio delay setting does not apply when playing in the EXT. IN mode or in the analog input direct mode or stereo mode (only when the crossover frequency is set to “FIXED–THX–” or front speaker is set to “Large”).

• By default, this menu is not displayed when no digital signals are being input.

3

q Select the item to be set. w Select the parameter.

Function/Mode Status :

Set whether or not to turn on the on-screen display of the input source name and input mode when an input source is selected.

Master Volume Status :

Set whether or not to turn on the on-screen display of the main volume level when the main volume is operated.

Display Mode :

Mode 1 : Prevents flickering of the on-screen display when there is no video signal. Mode 2 : Flickering is not prevented.

Use this mode if the on-screen display does not appear in the Mode 1, as may happen according to the TV being used.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4-7. Setting the On Screen Display (OSD)

• Use this to turn the on-screen display (messages other than the menu screens) on or off.

• Sets the on-screen display’s display mode.

1

　　１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ　　４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ　　５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ　　７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Select “On Screen Display” at the Video Setup Menu.

2

Display the On Screen Display setup screen.

　　　Ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ／Ｍｏｄｅ　Ｓｔａｔｕｓ　　　　　　　：

　　　Ｍａｓｔｅｒ　Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ　Ｓｔａｔｕｓ　　　　　　　：

　　　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　　　Ｍｏｄｅ１　：　Ｍｏｄｅ２

　４−７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Func/Mode: ON

*On Screen On Screen

*Video Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

78

4

Enter the setting. The Video Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

5

　　１．Ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　２．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｃａｌｅｒ　　４．３Ｄ　Ｙ／Ｃ　Ｓｅｐａｒａｔｉｏｎ　　５．ＨＤＭＩ／ＤＶＩ　Ｉｎ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ　　７．Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the Video Setup Menu screen. The System Setup Menu reappears.

Exit

*Video Setup

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

Setting the Advanced Playback

1

2

Select “Advanced Play back” at the System Setup Menu.

Display the Advanced Playback Menu screen.

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ　　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｎｕ

Advanced Play

*System Setup

　　１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ　　２．Ｄｏｌｂｙ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ

5

• Makes more detailed audio playback settings.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

2ch DRCT/ST

*Advanced Play

79

5-1. Setting the 2ch Direct/Stereo

• Set this when you want to change the speaker settings when the surround mode is set to the 2-channel Direct or Stereo mode.

1

　　１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ　　２．Ｄｏｌｂｙ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ

Select “2ch Direct / Stereo” at the Advanced Playback Menu.

2

Display the 2ch Direct / Stereo screen.

Setting Basic

*2ch DRCT/ST 2ch DRCT/ST

*Advanced Play

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

５−１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ

　　Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　　：　ＴＨＸ

　　Ｄｅｌａｙ　ＦＬ　　　：　１２．０ ft 　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　：　１２．０ ft

Example: This screen is displayed in function of the settings made at “2-1. Speaker

Configuration”, “2-2. Subwoofer Setup”, “2-3. Delay Time” and “2-4. Crossover Frequency”.

５−１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ

　　Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ　　　　：　　Ｂａｓｉｃ

　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　：

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

　　　　　　：

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

Ｍｏｄｅ　　：　　−ＴＨＸ−

Ye s

LFE

Small

3

Select “Custom”.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

5

Enter the setting. The Advanced Playback Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

５−１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ

　　Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ　　　　：　Ｃｕｓｔｏｍ

　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　：

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

　　　　　　：

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

Ｍｏｄｅ　　：　　　−ＴＨＸ−

Ye s

LFE

Small

Setting Custom

*2ch DRCT/ST

q Select the setting. w Select the parameter.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

2 Setting the front B speakers when the surround mode is set to the 2-channel

Direct or Stereo

When “Adv+Front B” is selected at “7-2. Power Amp Assign” and “Custom” is selected at this setting, the “Front B” setting is displayed.

•To play signals from the Front B speaker when in the 2-channel Direct or Stereo mode, set “Used”.

５−１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ

　　Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ　　　　：　Ｃｕｓｔｏｍ

　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　　　　　　：

　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　Ｂ　　　　：　　　Ｕｓｅｄ

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

　　　　　　：

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

Ｍｏｄｅ　　：

Ye s

LFE+Main

Large

80

5-2. Setting the Dolby Digital Setup

Sets the down-mixing method when not using a center speaker or surround speakers.

OFF: The dynamic range is not compressed. ON: The dynamic range is compressed automatically according to the combination of speakers being used.

1

Select “Dolby Digital Setup” at the Advanced Playback Menu.

　　１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ　　２．Ｄｏｌｂｙ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ

3

Select “ON” if you want to use the Compression, “OFF” if you do not want to use it.

　　　　Ｄｏｗｎｍｉｘ　Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　　　Ｃｏｍｐｒｅｓｓｉｏｎ

　　　　　　　　　　　：

５−２．Ｄｏｌｂｙ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ

ON

OFF

4

Enter the setting. The Advanced Playback Menu reappears.

NOTE:

When a center speaker or surround speakers are not connected, the sounds in those channels are directed to the front speakers.

Dolby D Setup

*Advanced Play Comp. : OFF

*Dolby D Setup

2

Press the ENTER button. Display the Dolby Digital Setup screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Set “Compression” to “ON” if it seems that sound is distorted because the input level exceeds the allowable input for the front speakers.

81

5-3. Setting the Auto Surround Mode

The surround mode used at last for the four types of input signals shown below is stored in the memory, and the signal is automatically played with that surround mode the next time it is input. Note that the surround mode setting is also stored separately for the different input sources.

q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals (STEREO) w 2-channel signals of Dolby Digital, DTS or other multi-channel format (DOLBY PLIIx cinema)

e Multi-channel signals of Dolby Digital, DTS or other multi-channel format (DOLBY/DTS SURROUND) r PCM and DSD multi-channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS (MULTI CH IN)

Default settings are indicated in ( ). During playback in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed.

1

Select “Auto Surround Mode” at the Advanced Playback Menu.

　　１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ　　２．Ｄｏｌｂｙ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ

Auto Surround

*Advanced Play

2

Press the ENTER button. Display the Auto Surround Mode screen.

3

Select “ON” if you want to use the auto surround mode, “OFF” if you do not want to use it.

　　　　　　　　　　　：

　５−３．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｍｏｄｅ

ON

OFF

4

Enter the setting. The Advanced Playback Menu reappears.

ON/OFF: ON

*Auto Surround

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

(Remote control unit)

Contents stored in the auto surround mode can be checked with the onscreen display.

　　　２

ｃｈ

：ＳＴＥＲＥＯ

ｃｈ

：ＭＵＬＴＩ　ＣＨ　ＩＮ

　　　２

ｃｈ

：ＤＯＬＢＹ　ＰＬＩＩｘ　ｃｉｎｅｍａ

　５．１

ｃｈ

：ＤＯＬＢＹ／ＤＴＳ　ＳＵＲＲＯＵＮＤ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　ＯＳＤ−４

　Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｍｏｄｅ

Multi

PCM

ANALOG

DIGITAL

CD

82

5-4. Setting the Manual EQ Setup

　　１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ　　２．Ｄｏｌｂｙ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ

1

Select “Manual EQ Setup” at the Advanced Playback Menu.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Adjust CH L/R

*Manual EQ

• Allows you to adjust the tonal quality of the various speakers (except the subwoofer) while listening to a music source.

５−４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ

　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ　　Ｙｅｓ　　Ｂａｓｅ　Ｃｕｒｖｅ　Ｃｏｐｙ

　　Ａｄｊｕｓｔ　ＣＨ　　Ｌ／Ｒ　ＣＨ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

2

Display the Manual EQ screen.

CH SEL ENTER

Manual EQ Setup

*Advanced Play

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

(Main unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

Select the adjustment mode, then press the ENTER button.

All CH : All channels can be adjusted simultaneously. L/R CH : The left and right channels of the pair of speakers can be adjusted simultaneously. Each CH : The channels can be adjusted separately.

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

4

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Select the speaker to be set. The display changes as follows.

!!Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　Ｌ／Ｒ　　　　　　　　　　　　　６３㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　１２５㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　２５０㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　５００㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　１ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　２ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　４ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　８ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　１６ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

６３

１２５

２５０

５００

１ｋ２ｋ４ｋ

８ｋ

１６ｋ

−２０

−

６

０

＋

６

q Select “L/R CH”

Example: When “L/R CH” is selected.

FL/FR

SBL/SBR

C

SLA/SRA

SLB/SRB

w Select “Each CH”

FL

SBR

1spkr

FR

C

SLA

SLB

SRB

SBL

SRA

SB

When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” at “Speaker Configuration”, this is set to “SB”.

e Select “All CH”

In this case, speaker selection is not performed. If a value is already set for the FL channel, the data stored for the FL channel is displayed.

Front L/R

*Manual EQ:L/R

83

!!Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　Ｌ／Ｒ　　　　　　　　　　　　　６３㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　１２５㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　２５０㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　５００㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　１ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　２ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　４ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　　８ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　１６ｋ㎐　　　０．０

ｄＢ

６３

１２５

２５０

５００

１ｋ２ｋ４ｋ

８ｋ

１６ｋ

−２０

−

６

０

＋

６

5

Select the frequency.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

6

Use the Cursor left and right buttons to adjust the Gain level.

• Each frequency can be adjusted the range from –20 dB to +6 dB in 0.5 dB step.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

7

Enter the setting. The Manual EQ screen reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

63Hz : 0.0dB

*Manual EQ:L/R

8

Select “Exit”, then press the ENTER button. The Advanced Playback Menu reappears.

５−４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ

　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ　　Ｙｅｓ

　　Ａｄｊｕｓｔ　ＣＨ　　Ｌ／Ｒ　ＣＨ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

To restore the settings to their defaults, select “Default Yes 0” then press the Cursor left button.

５−４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ

　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ　　Ｙｅｓ　　Ｂａｓｅ　Ｃｕｒｖｅ　Ｃｏｐｙ

　　Ａｄｊｕｓｔ　ＣＨ　　Ｌ／Ｒ　ＣＨ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

Exit

*Manual EQ

9

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at the Advanced Playback Menu screen. The System Setup Menu reappears.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

　　１．２ｃｈ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ　　２．Ｄｏｌｂｙ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ

Exit

*Advanced Play

84

2 Procedure for copying the “Flat” correction curve set at “Auto Setup”, then using the graphic equalizer to adjust

manually

NOTE: If the “Auto Setup” procedure has not been performed, this item is not displayed.

1

Select “Base Curve Copy”.

５−４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ

　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ　　Ｙｅｓ　　Ｂａｓｅ　Ｃｕｒｖｅ　Ｃｏｐｙ

　　Ａｄｊｕｓｔ　ＣＨ　　Ｌ／Ｒ　ＣＨ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

BaseCurve Copy

*Manual EQ

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

2

The Base Curve Select screen appears when the Cursor left button is pressed.

　　５−４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ

　　　　Ｃｕｒｖｅ：　−Ｆｌａｔ−

　　　Ｂａｓｅ　Ｃｕｒｖｅ　Ｃｏｐｙ？　　　　　　　：

Ye s

No

Copy?: No

*Base Curve

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

Select “Base Curve Copy?”, then press the Cursor left button to select “Yes”.

　　５−４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ

　　　Ｂａｓｅ　Ｃｕｒｖｅ　Ｃｏｐｙ？　　　　　　　：

　　　　Ｃｕｒｖｅ：　−Ｆｌａｔ−

Ye s

No

Copy?: Yes

*Base Curve

4

Enter the setting. The Manual EQ screen reappears. The type of the copied correction curve is displayed in the upper right of this screen.

５−４．Ｍａｎｕａｌ　ＥＱ　　　　　−Ｆｌａｔ−

　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ　　Ｙｅｓ　　Ｂａｓｅ　Ｃｕｒｖｅ　Ｃｏｐｙ

　　Ａｄｊｕｓｔ　ＣＨ　　Ｌ／Ｒ　ＣＨ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

85

Setting the Zone Setup (Zone2 = 5.1/7.1ch)

1

2

Select “Zone Setup” at the System Setup Menu.

Display the Zone Setup Menu screen.

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ　　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｎｕ

Zone Setup

*System Setup

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

6

• Make the settings related to surround playback and video for Zone2.

• Adjust the sound played in Zone3 and Zone4.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Z2 Sp Config.

*Zone Setup

NOTE:

• When “STEREO” or “MONO” is selected for the Zone2 channel output setting at “7-1. Channel Setup” (see pages 97~100), the menu screen displayed differs. In this case, see the instructions starting at page 96.

86

3

Set whether speakers are connected or not in Zone2 and their size parameters. Select the speakers connected in Zone2 and the size parameters.

q Select the speaker.

w Select the parameter.

For a description of the different parameters, see page 47.

　　６−１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｕｒｒｏｕｎｄ　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｐ．

Small None

Zone-2

　　６−１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｆｒｏｎｔ　Ｓｐ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃｅｎｔｅｒ　Ｓｐ．

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ

Ye s

No

Large

Small

Small None

Zone-2

Zone2 Center Sp.

Zone2 Front Sp.

Zone2 Subwoofer

Zone2 Surround Sp.

(Zone2 Surround back Sp.)

*

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Front : Small

*Z2 Sp Config.

4

Enter the setting. The Zone Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

*

This is only displayed when “7.1ch” is selected for the Zone2 channel output setting at “7-1. Channel Setup”. (See pages 97~100)

6-1. Setting the type of speakers for Zone2

• The composition of the signals output to each channels and the frequency response are adjusted automatically according to the combination of speakers actually being used in Zone2.

1

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Select “Speaker Config.” at the Zone Setup Menu.

2

Display the Speaker Config. screen as below.

Z2 Sp Config.

*Zone Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

87

6-2. Setting the low frequency distribution for Zone2

• Set the subwoofer mode according to the speaker systems used in Zone2.

1

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Select “Subwoofer Mode” at the Zone Setup Menu.

2

Display the Subwoofer Mode screen.

　　６−２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ

　　　　　ＬＦＥ　　　：　　　ＬＦＥ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　＋Ｍａｉｎ

Zone-2

LFE

*Z2 SW Mode Z2 SW Mode

*Zone Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

Select the setting.

LFE :

For any channel(s) that are set to LARGE, low frequencies in that channel’s corresponding source are directed to that loudspeaker only. Low frequencies that are directed to the subwoofer(s) are from the program source LFE channel, and from other channels where the speakers are set to SMALL.

LFE + Main :

Low frequencies from speaker channels that have been set to LARGE are reproduced from those speakers as well as from the subwoofer(s). Depending upon the characteristics of the LARGE main speakers, this mode may provide a more even low frequency response throughout the listening room.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

Enter the setting. The Zone Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

NOTE:

• The subwoofer mode setting is only valid when “Large” is set for the Zone2 front speakers and “Yes” is set for the subwoofer in the “6-1. Speaker Configuration” settings. (See page 86)

88

6-3. Setting the Delay Time for Zone2

• Input the distance between the listening position and each speakers in Zone2 to set the surround delay time for Zone2.

1

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Select “Delay Time” at the Zone Setup Menu.

2

Display the Delay Time screen.

　　６−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ

　Ｓｅｔ　Ｔｈｅ　Ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ　Ｔｏ　Ｅａｃｈ　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒｓ

　Ｄｏ　Ｙｏｕ　Ｐｒｅｆｅｒ　　Ｉｎ　Ｍｅｔｅｒｓ？　／　Ｉｎ　Ｆｅｅｔ？

　　　Ｍｅｔｅｒｓ　　：　　Ｆｅｅｔ

Zone-2

Meters : Feet

*Z2 Delay Time Z2 Delay Time

*Zone Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

Select the desired unit, meters or feet.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　６−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ

　Ｓｅｔ　Ｔｈｅ　Ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ　Ｔｏ　Ｅａｃｈ　Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒｓ

　Ｄｏ　Ｙｏｕ　Ｐｒｅｆｅｒ　　Ｉｎ　Ｍｅｔｅｒｓ？　／　Ｉｎ　Ｆｅｅｔ？

　　　Ｍｅｔｅｒｓ　　：　　Ｆｅｅｔ

Zone-2

Example: When “Feet” is selected

4

Once “Meters” or “Feet” is selected in step 3, the Delay Time screen appears automatically.

FL : 12.0ft

*Z2 Delay Time

　　６−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　　　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　　　　１０．０

ｆｔ

Zone-2

　　６−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｐ　　　　　１

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

Ye s

Zone-2

5

Select the speaker to be set. The picture of the speaker selected blinks.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

89

7

Enter the setting. The Zone Setup Menu reappears. The AVR-5805 automatically sets the optimum surround delay time for the Zone2 listening room.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

6

Set the distance between the center speaker and listening position. The distance changes in units of 0.1 foot (0.03 meters) or 1 foot (0.3 meters) each time the button is pressed. Select the value closest to the measured distance.

　　６−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　　　　１０．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　　　　１０．０

ｆｔ

Zone-2

If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the settings are automatically reset to the default values. When “Step” is selected, you can select the unit of “1ft (0.1m)” or “0.1ft (0.01m)”.

Please note that the difference of distance for every speaker should be 20 ft (6.0 m) or less. If you set an invalid distance, a CAUTION notice, such as screen right will appear. In this case, please relocate the blinking speaker(s) so that its distance is no larger than the value shown in highlighted line.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｐ　　　　　１

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　ＲＥＬＯＣＡＴＥ　ＢＬＩＮＫＩＮＧ　ＳＰ！

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　３０．０

ｆｔ

Ye s

　　６−３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｐ　　　　　１

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｄｅｆａｕｌｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　１２．０

ｆｔ

Ye s

Zone-2

Example: When the distance is set to 12 feet

for the center speaker

90

6-4. Setting the Channel Level for Zone2

• Use this setting to adjust so that the playback level between the different channels of Zone2 is equal.

•From the Zone2 listening position, listen to the test tones produced from the speakers used in Zone2 to adjust the level.

• The level can also be adjusted directly from the Remote control unit. (For details, see pages 159, 160.)

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　６−４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　　　　：　　

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｌｅａｒ

Ye s

Manual

Auto

Zone-2

1

2

Select “Channel Level” at the Zone Setup Menu.

Display the Channel Level screen.

Z2 Channel Lev.

*Zone Setup T.Tone: Auto

*Z2 Channel Lev

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　６−４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　　　　：　　

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｌｅａｒ

Ye s

Manual

Auto

Zone-2

3

Select the mode. Select “Auto” or “Manual”.

Example: When the “Auto” mode is selected

T.Tone: Auto

*Z2 Channel Lev

Auto :

Adjust the level while listening to the test tones produced automatically from each speaker.

Manual :

Select the speaker from which you want to produce the test tone to adjust the level.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

5

Select “Test Tone Start”.

　６−４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　　　　：　　

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｌｅａｒ

Ye s

Manual

Auto

Zone-2

Select “Yes”.

Tone Start:Yes

*Z2 Channel Lev

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

91

7

Enter the setting. The Channel Level screen reappears.

NOTES:

• When adjusting the level of an active subwoofer system, you may also need to adjust the subwoofer’s own volume control.

• When you adjust the channel levels while in the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL mode, the channel level adjustments made will affect all surround modes for Zone2.

• After you have completed the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL adjustments, you can then activate the individual surround modes and adjust channel levels that will be remembered for each of those modes. Then, whenever you activate a particular surround sound mode, your preferred channel level adjustments for just that mode will be recalled. Check the instructions for adjusting channel levels within each surround mode. (See pages 159, 160)

•You can adjust the channel levels for each of the following surround modes for Zone2: STEREO, DOLBY/DTS SURROUND, 5/7 CH STEREO, WIDE SCREEN, SUPER STADIUM, ROCK ARENA, JAZZ CLUB, CLASSIC CONCERT, MONO MOVIE, VIDEO GAME, MATRIX and VIRTUAL.

6

a. When “Auto” mode is selected:

Test tones are automatically emitted from each speaker used in Zone2. The test tones are emitted from each speaker in the following order, at 4-second intervals the first time and second time around, 2second intervals the third time around and on:

Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ ! 　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　−１１．５

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

Auto

Zone-2

Use the Cursor left and right buttons to adjust all the speakers to the same volume. The volume can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in units of 0.5 dB.

b. When “Manual” mode is selected:

Example: When the volume is set to –11.5 dB

while the test tone is being produced from the Front Lch speaker

FL C FR SR SL SW

FL : -11.5dB

Z2 Test Tone A

q Select the speaker used in Zone2. w Adjust all the speakers to the same

volume.

Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ ! 　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＬ　　　−１１．５

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｃ　　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＦＲ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＲ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＬ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

　　　　　　　　　　　　ＳＷ　　　　　０．０

ｄＢ

Zone-2

Manual

Example: “Manual” mode is selected.

FL : -11.5dB

Z2 Test Tone M

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

To cancel the settings, press the Cursor down button to select “Level Clear” and “Yes” on the “Channel Level” screen, then make the settings again.

　６−４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　　　　　　：　　

　　Ｔｅｓｔ　Ｔｏｎｅ　Ｓｔａｒｔ

　　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　Ｃｌｅａｒ

Ye s

Manual

Auto

Zone-2

Flashing

92

6-5. Setting the Crossover Frequency for Zone2

　６−５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ

　　　　　　　　Ｖａｒｉａｂｌｅ　　　　　　　　　　８０Ｈｚ　

Zone-2

1

Select the “Crossover Frequency” at the Zone Setup Menu.

• Set the frequency (in Hz) below which deep bass appearing in the main channels will be routed to the Zone2 subwoofer.

Select the frequency.

Z2 Crossover

*Zone Setup

4

Enter the setting. The Zone Setup Menu reappears.

3

2

Display the Crossover Frequency screen.

80Hz

*Z2 Crossover

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

VARIABLE 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 150, 200, 250 Hz :

Set as desired according to your speakers’ bass playback ability.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

NOTES:

• For the majority of home theater speaker systems, we recommend that the crossover frequency be set to 80 Hz. When using very compact speakers, however, it may be advantageous to select a higher crossover frequency. Check the specified low frequency limit of each speaker (usually published in the specifications tables in speaker owner’s manuals).

• The crossover frequency mode is valid only when subwoofer is set to ON, and when one or more speakers are set to SMALL, as described in section “6-1. Speaker Configuration” settings. (See page 86)

93

6-6. Setting the Video Setup for Zone2

[1] Video Convert Mode (Zone2)

• Select the video input signal to be output to the Zone2 composit, S-Video and component monitor output terminals using the video conversion function.

　６−６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ

　　　　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ

　　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

Zone-2

Z2 Video Mode

*Z2 Video Setup

1

Select “Video Setup” at the Zone Setup Menu.

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Z2 Video Setup

*Zone Setup

2

Display the Video Setup screen.

3

Select “Video Convert Mode”, then press the ENTER button. Display the Video Convert Mode.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

６−６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ　　　　　　：　ＡＵＴＯ

Zone-2

DVD

V.Aux

VDP

TV

DBS VCR-1 VCR-2 VCR-3 VCR-4

DVD : Auto

*Z2 Video Mode

4

q Select the Zone2 input source. w Select the mode as below.

AUTO : When there are multiple input signals for the input sources selected at Zone2, the input signal is detected and the input

signal output to the Zone2’s monitor output terminal is selected automatically, in the following order of priority: Component, S-Video, Composite.

Component : The component video input signal is always selected.

If there is no component input signal among the input sources selected at Zone2, no video signals are output to the Zone2 component monitor output terminal.

S-Video : The S-Video input signal is always selected. Video : The composite input signal is always selected. OFF : The convert function does not operate.

The video signal of the input source selected at Zone2 is only output to the Zone2 video monitor output terminal. The S-Video signal selected at Zone2 is only output to the Zone2 S-Video monitor output terminal.

If “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the settings are automatically reset to the default values.

AUTO

Component

S-video Video OFF

The details in each mode are as follows.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

94

5

Press the ENTER button to return to the Video Setup screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

[2] Audio Delay (Zone2)

• Set this if it seems there is a delay in the picture on the monitor screen with respect to the sound when watching a DVD or other video source in the Zone2 listening room. Adjust the audio delay to delay the sound and synchronize the sound and picture.

• The audio delay setting is stored in the memory individually for the different input sources selected at Zone2.

1

Select “Audio Delay” at the Video Setup screen.

　６−６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ

　　　　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ

　　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

Zone-2

Z2 Audio Delay

*Z2 Video Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

2

Display the Audio Delay screen.

　６−６．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ

　　　　　　：　　　　　　　　　　０ｍｓ

Zone-2

DVD

Input!Source

0ms

*Z2 Audio Delay

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

Set the delay time. (0 ms ~ 200 ms)

With a movie source, for example, adjust so that the movement of the actors’ lips is synchronized with the sound.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

4

Press the ENTER button to return to the Video Setup screen.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

5

Select “Exit”, then press the ENTER button to return the Zone Setup Menu screen.

　６−６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　　　Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｔ　Ｍｏｄｅ

　　　　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｄｅｌａｙ

　　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

Zone-2

Exit

*Z2 Video Setup

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

95

6-7. Zone3 and Zone4 tone control and channel level setting

1

Select “Zone3/4 Tone/Ch Lev.” at the Zone Setup Menu.

• Adjust the sound output from Zone3 and Zone4.

Zone3/4

*Zone Setup

2

Display the Zone3/4 Tone/Ch Lev. screen.

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

Select the Zone whose sound you want to adjust. (Zone3, Zone4) Switch to the setting screen.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

Bass : 0dB

*Z3 Tone/Ch Lev

4

q Select the item to be set. w Adjust the parameter.

Bass : Adjust the tone for the bass. Treble : Adjust the tone for the treble.

(The bass or treble sound can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in steps of 2.0 dB.)

HPF : Set this to “ON” if your speakers do not have a very strong capacity for producing low bass. Using the high pass filter

makes it possible to reduce distortion of the bass sound.

Channel Level : Set so that the playback level is the same for the left and right channels.

(The volume can adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in steps of 1.0 dB.)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　６−７．Ｚｏｎｅ３　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．

　　　Ｂａｓｓ　　　　　　　　　　０ｄＢ　　　Ｔｒｅｂｌｅ　　　　　　　　０ｄＢ　　　ＨＰＦ　　　　　　　　　　　ＯＦＦ　　　Ｌｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　　　　　０ｄＢ　　　Ｒｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　　　　　０ｄＢ

Example: When “Zone3” is selected

5

Press the ENTER button to return to the Zone3/4 Tone/Ch Lev. screen.

Use the same procedure to make the settings for Zone4.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Z3 Tone/Ch Lev.

*Zone3/4

６−７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．

　　　Ｚｏｎｅ３　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．

　　　Ｚｏｎｅ４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．

　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

96

6

Select “Exit” then press the ENTER button. The Zone Setup Menu reappears.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

Exit

*Zone3/4

６−７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．

　　　Ｚｏｎｅ３　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．

　　　Ｚｏｎｅ４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．

　　　Ｅｘｉｔ

7

Select “Exit” and press the ENTER button at Zone Setup Menu screen. The System Setup Menu reappears.

(Main unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Remote control unit)

CH SEL

ENTER

(Main unit)

(Remote control unit)

Exit

*Zone Setup

　　１．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇ．　　２．Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　Ｍｏｄｅ　　３．Ｄｅｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ　　４．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｌｅｖｅｌ　　５．Ｃｒｏｓｓｏｖｅｒ　Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ　　６．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｚｏｎｅ３／４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

2 “Zone Setup” setting when Zone2 is set to “STEREO” or “MONO”

The “Zone Setup” screen shown below is displayed when “STEREO” or “MONO” is selected for the Zone2 channel setting at “7-1. Channel Setup”.

Z2 Tone/Ch Lev.

*Zone Setup

　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　１．Ｚｏｎｅ２　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　２．Ｚｏｎｅ３　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　３．Ｚｏｎｅ４　Ｔｏｎｅ／Ｃｈ　Ｌｅｖ．　　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

• For instructions on making the Zone2, 3 and 4 “Tone/Ch Level” settings (items 1 to 3), see pages 95, 96.

• For instructions on the “Video Setup” (item 4), see pages 93, 94.

97

Setting the Option Setup

1

2

Select “Option Setup” at the System Setup Menu.

Display the Option Setup Menu Screen.

　　１．Ａｕｔｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ／Ｒｏｏｍ　ＥＱ　　２．Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　３．Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｐｕｔ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　４．Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　５．Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ｐｌａｙｂａｃｋ　　６．Ｚｏｎｅ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｎｕ

Option Setup

*System Setup

　　１．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　２．Ｐｏｗｅｒ　Ａｍｐ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　３．Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ　　４．Ｔｒｉｇｇｅｒ　Ｏｕｔ　　５．ＡＣ　Ｏｕｔｌｅｔ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ／Ｌｏｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

7

•Make other expert settings.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

Channel Setup

*Option Setup

7-1. Setting the Channel setup

•With this setting it is possible to change the number of channels played in the different zones according to the purpose. The AVR-5805 is equipped with pre-out connectors for a total of 22 channels. 16 channel of these pre-out connectors can be assigned between the Main zone and Zone2 (Theater). In addition, up to three channels of subwoofers can be added to the Main zone, so subwoofers can be set in the front and back or at the sides. The number of channels output from the pre-out connectors exclusively for Zone2, 3 and 4 can be set to “MONO” or “STEREO” according to the method of playback in the various multi-zones.

Set the number of channels for the Main zone’s main channel.

The number of channels that can be set for Zone2 depends of the number of channels in the Main zone. See the table on page 99.

2 Channel setup flow

Set the number of subwoofer channels for the Main zone.

Set the number of channels for the Zone2.

Set the number of channels for the Zone3.

Set the number of channels for the Zone4.

98

4

Enter the setting. The Option Setup Menu reappears.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

1

　　１．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ　　２．Ｐｏｗｅｒ　Ａｍｐ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　３．Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ　　４．Ｔｒｉｇｇｅｒ　Ｏｕｔ　　５．ＡＣ　Ｏｕｔｌｅｔ　Ａｓｓｉｇｎ　　６．Ｓｅｔｕｐ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ／Ｌｏｃｋ

　　Ｅｘｉｔ

　７．Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

Select “Channel Setup” at the Option Setup Menu.

2

Display the Channel Setup screen.

　７−１．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｍａｉｎ　Ｚｏｎｅ　　　Ｍａｉｎ　　　　　　　　　９．１ＣＨ

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

　　　　　　　　　１ＳＰ

　　Ｚｏｎｅ２　　　　　　　　　５．１ＣＨ　　Ｚｏｎｅ３　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ　　Ｚｏｎｅ４　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ

Main : 9.1CH

*Channel Setup Channel Setup

*Option Setup

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

3

q Select the Zone. w Select the channel setting.

Also select the number of subwoofers and the output composition to be used in the Main zone. Refer to the table on page 99.

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

CH SEL ENTER

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

　７−１．Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ　Ｓｅｔｕｐ

　　Ｍａｉｎ　Ｚｏｎｅ　　　Ｍａｉｎ　　　　　　　　　９．１ＣＨ

Ｓｕｂｗｏｏｆｅｒ　

　　　　　　３ＳＰ

　　Ｚｏｎｅ２　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ　　Ｚｏｎｅ３　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ　　Ｚｏｎｅ４　　　　　　　　Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ

L/R/LFE

99

2 The subwoofer output composition is as shown below.

Subwoofer Output Composition

1 SP

– Select this when only one subwoofer is connected.

L/R Select this when subwoofers are installed on the left and right.

F/B Select this when subwoofers are installed at the front and rear.

2 SP

LFE/M

Select this to use the subwoofer for both the main channel’s low frequencies and for LFE low frequencies.

L/R/LFE

Select this when subwoofers are installed on the left and right and you are using a subwoofer specifically for the LFE.

F/B/LFE

Select this when subwoofers are installed at the front and rear and you are using a subwoofer specifically for the LFE.

3 SP

2 The number of channels that can be selected for the different zones is as shown below.

MAIN ZONE

Main Subwoofer

ZONE2 ZONE4

ZONE3

5.1 CH 1 SP 7.1 CH / 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO

2 SP 7.1 CH / 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO

3 SP 7.1 CH / 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO

7.1 CH

1 SP 7.1 CH / 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO

2 SP 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO

3 SP 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO

9.1 CH

1 SP 5.1 CH / STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO

2 SP STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO

3 SP STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO STEREO / MONO

NOTE:

• The channel settings that can be selected for Zone2 depend on the channel settings for the main zone.

100

2 Connecting the preouts

The pre-out connector used to connect the subwoofer depends on the main zone’s channel setup. Connect as shown on the diagram below.

9.1 CH / 7.1 CH /

5.1 CH

1 SP

Channel Setup

Main Subwoofer

Connection

Subwoofer

5.1 CH 2 SP

Subwoofer(R/B/LFE)

Subwoofer(L/F/M)

3 SP

Subwoofer(R/B)

Subwoofer(L/F)LFE

7.1 CH 2 SP

Subwoofer(R/B/LFE)

Subwoofer(L/F/M)

3 SP

Subwoofer(R/B)

Subwoofer(L/F)

LFE

9.1 CH 2 SP

Subwoofer(R/B/LFE)

Subwoofer(L/F/M)

3 SP

Subwoofer(R/B)

Subwoofer(L/F)

LFE

Denon AVR-5805 Operating Instruction

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual